FANUC ROBODRILL Custom PMC Function Manual

FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
@-D14M+A5
@-D14L+A5
@-D14S+A5
@-D21M+A5
@-D21L+A5
@-D21S+A5
CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
WARNING
To use the products explained herein safely, read carefully and understand
completely all the descriptions about safety at the beginning of this manual
and those about the functions you are going to use. Failing to follow any
safety precaution or any direction described herein may lead to death or
injury. Always keep this manual near your product, so you can reference
it whenever necessary.
B-85314EN-1/01
WARNING
Before starting to install, operate, or maintain the product, carefully read and
understand the "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS." Failing to follow any of these safety
precautions and other cautions stated herein may lead to death or injury.
The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is:
Product name
Abbreviation
FANUC ROBODRILL -D14 (M,L,S) i A5
-D14 i A5
FANUC ROBODRILL -D21 (M,L, S) i A5

Controller: A04B-0102- B201, B301, B302
FANUC Series 31i-B5
Mechanical Unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113
A04B-0102- B101,B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,
B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116
-D21 i A5
To help prevent accidents that may occur due to incorrect handling, this operator's manual indicates
cautions with marks. The meaning of each mark is explained below. Before starting to read the text of
the cautions, be sure to understand the meaning of the corresponding marks.
Indicates that incorrect handling will invite an imminent danger of death or
DANGER:
serious injury.
WARNING:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to light or moderate injury.
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SUPPLEMENT:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to damage not only to the product
of interest but also to other properties.
Describes precautions for protecting the product of interest from damage.
Describes information for effective and efficient use of the product of interest.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade Law. The export of -D14MiA5/D14LiA5/D14SiA5, -D21MiA5/D21LiA5/D21SiA5
from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Other models in this
manual may also be subject to export controls. Further, re-export to another country may be
subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported.
Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States
government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC
for advice.
In this manual, we have tried to describe as many matters as possible.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially
described as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible." If you wander
whether a specific matter is possible, ask FANUC.
PREFACE
B-85314EN-1/01
PREFACE
PURPOSES OF THE MACHINE

The FANUC ROBODRILL -DiA5 series is a machine tool that operates under control of a CNC
(computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, light milling, milling, and boring.
It should not be used for any other purposes.
DEFINITION OF USERS
2.1
Operators
In this manual, the term operator refers to a person who operates the machine.
The operator must read this manual and become familiar with its contents. If the operator operates the
machine without becoming familiar with its contents, the operator and the people around the machine
may be in serious danger.
The operator is not allowed to carry out maintenance work that involves:
(1) Removal of a cover that requires a tool for its removal (fixed cover)
(2) Installation and movement of the machine
2.2
Daily Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Personnel
These personnel must have completed ROBODRILL course at the Robomachine Department at the
FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge and must also be qualified by the company or
organization to which they belong.
Daily maintenance and preventive maintenance personnel must observe the "Cautions on Maintenance,"
described below.
Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must
observe during maintenance
p-1
PREFACE
2.3
B-85314EN-1/01
WARNING
Before removing a cover for maintenance purposes, be sure to set the control
unit cabinet door circuit breaker for the machine to its off position. Otherwise, an
unexpected behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.
Before switching on the power with a cover removed for maintenance purposes,
make sure that no one is beside the machine. Otherwise, an unexpected
behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.
Before starting maintenance work, post a notice near the control unit cabinet
door circuit breaker to indicate that no one except the worker of interest is
allowed to switch on the power.
Before switching on the power and operating the machine during or after
maintenance work, make sure that no tool or the like is left in the machine.
Otherwise, when the machine runs, it may strike the tool or the like toward
people around the machine.
When making electrical adjustments with a cover removed, use a tool with a
sufficient electrical protection (for example, a screwdriver made of plastic).
Otherwise, there is a risk of an electrical shock.
After maintenance work, make sure that all components, including screws, that
were removed for maintenance purposes are back in place. Otherwise, safety
devices may fail to function, or injury may occur, because of a malfunction or
electric shock.
When replacing maintenance parts, be sure to keep the control unit cabinet door
circuit breaker set to its off position. Otherwise, there may occur damage to the
maintenance parts or an electrical shock.
The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shall
not be engaged in replacement of the CNC memory backup battery or
fluorescent lamps within the machine. Only the maintenance engineer is
allowed to replace such electrical components. Work by any person with no
sufficient knowledge may disable safety devices from working, resulting in an
unexpected behavior of the machine that may cause injury or an electric shock.
Be sure to close and lock the control unit cabinet door upon completion of
maintenance work to prevent fluid such as coolant or chippings from entering the
unit. Similarly, be sure to close the covers of the operator's panel and cable duct
and securely tighten the mounting screws of the covers.
Maintenance Personnel
These personnel must have sufficient knowledge of machinery or electricity to perform maintenance
properly, must have completed a maintenance course at the FA or Robomachine Department of the
FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge, and must also be qualified by the company or
organization to which they belong.
Maintenance personnel perform work including:
(1) Installation and movement of the machine
(2) Repair of the machine (replacement of mechanical units and replacement of electric components that
require setup and adjustment after being replaced)
Maintenance personnel must observe the "Caution on Maintenance," described above. Experienced
maintenance personnel, in particular, should avoid accidents due to carelessness or overconfidence.
p-2
PREFACE
B-85314EN-1/01
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

This manual covers the following models:
Model name
Control unit:
A04B-0102-B201, B301, B302
FANUC Series 31i-B5
Mechanical unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113
A04B-0102-B101, B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,
B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116
Abbreviation
-D14 i A5
-D21 i A5
The manuals for this machine include the following:

(1) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN):
Describes how to use and maintain this machine.
(2) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION OPERATOR'S
MANUAL (B-85314EN-1): This manual. Describes how to operate the custom PMC function, as
well as programming.
(3) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64484EN): Describes how to operate
numerical control (NC) units and how to create programs.
(4) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN):
Describes alarms, how to perform troubleshooting, and how to replace parts.
(5) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64485EN): Describes how to
perform troubleshooting and adjustment on numerical control (NC) units.
Before using this machine, read the necessary parts of manual (1).
For daily handling and for reference, use manuals (1) and (3).
Use manuals (4) and (5) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of machine sections.
Descriptions in manuals (1), (2), and (4) have priority over those in manuals (3) and (5). In you find any
contradiction, assume that the description in manuals (1), (2), and (4) applies.
This manual contains minimum requirements for using the custom PMC function.
If you require more detailed explanation, see the following manual:
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B, Series
35i-MODEL B
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)
p-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-85314EN-1/01
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1
OUTLINE ................................................................................................. 1
EXPLANATION OF TERMS.................................................................... 3
NOTES .................................................................................................... 4
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 5
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 6

5.1
5.2
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......................................... 6

OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 10
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
I/O Unit Model-A...................................................................................................10

I/O Link Connection Unit.......................................................................................22
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ........................................................22
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)..........................................37

Optional I/O Module Connection...........................................................................46
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used.....................................46
5.2.3.1
Terminal Module B............................................................................................ 29
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC.................................... 47
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS ......................................... 48
EDITING ................................................................................................ 50
8.1
8.2
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ............................................................ 50

EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS................................................................. 51
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Switching to the Edit Screen ..................................................................................51

Editing Ladder Programs........................................................................................53
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES ...................................... 65

EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ..................................................... 68
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION ................................................................ 70
CONFIRMATION................................................................................... 71
9.1
9.2
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS ..................................... 71

SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS................................................................................... 73
10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS ............................................................ 74

11 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA .......................................................... 78
11.1
11.2
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN...................................... 78

OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN ...................................................... 81
12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER

PROGRAMS.......................................................................................... 84
12.1
12.2
12.3
BASIC SIGNALS ....................................................................................... 105

MACHINE STATUS ................................................................................... 105
FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL .................................................. 106
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
12.17
12.18
12.19
12.20
12.21
12.22
12.23
12.24
12.25
12.26
12.27
12.28
12.29
12.30
12.31
12.32
12.33
12.34
12.35
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION ..................... 108

EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION......................... 110
EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..................................... 113
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89) ......................................... 116
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION)................. 117
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ........................................................... 117
ALARM OUTPUT 2.................................................................................... 117
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT...................................................................... 118
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL .................................................... 120
OPERATOR'S PANEL............................................................................... 121
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ............................................................ 122
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT ................................................................ 123
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ................................................................... 124
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER
THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW .................................................. 125
COMPLETION OF MACHINING................................................................ 125
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL ............................................................. 126
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ...................................................... 126
AI TOOL MONITOR................................................................................... 127
SPINDLE ................................................................................................... 127
SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 128
POSITION SWITCH .................................................................................. 128
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS ......................................... 129
CUSTOM MACROS .................................................................................. 130
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ................................................................ 131
OPERATION CONTROL ........................................................................... 131
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY ...................................... 132
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP ..................................................................... 132
POWER-OFF............................................................................................. 132
OVERRIDE CONTROL ............................................................................. 133
ROBOT INTERFACE................................................................................. 134
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item ..................................... 136
BLOCK SKIP ............................................................................................. 136
13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................. 137

14 SETTING PARAMETERS ................................................................... 143
15 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST ........................................... 144
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen .................. 144
PMC System Alarm Messages .................................................................. 152
Operation Errors ........................................................................................ 157
I/O Communication Error Messages.......................................................... 172
APPENDIX
A
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III ......................... 181

A.1
CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................................................ 182

c-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-85314EN-1/01
A.2
LADDER PROGRAM EDITING ................................................................. 185

A.2.1
A.2.2
A.2.3
A.2.4
A.2.5
A.2.6
A.3
A.4
A.5
LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION . 190

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION............................................. 193
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES .................................... 205
A.5.1
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 209

SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT ...... 213
SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 214
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING
THE VALUES OF SIGNALS ...................................................................... 215
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE

............................................................................................................. 218
C.1
C.2
Ladder Program Message Editing ........................................................................205
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION............................................... 209

B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
Title Editing..........................................................................................................185
Ladder Editing......................................................................................................186
Symbol and Comment Editing .............................................................................187
Message Editing ...................................................................................................188
I/O Module Editing ..............................................................................................189
System Parameter Editing ....................................................................................189
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 218

SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................ 218
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ........................................ 220

D.1
D.2
D.3
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY.......... 221

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER
PROGRAM ................................................................................................ 223
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA.............................................................. 225
D.3.1
D.3.2
D.4
D.5
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display.......................................225

Converting the Ladder Program ...........................................................................226
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC... 227

CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC
FORMAT FILE ........................................................................................... 227
c-3
1.OUTLINE
B-85314EN-1/01
OUTLINE
The custom PMC function allows customers to create sequence programs on their own. The features of
the function include:
(1) Does not require hardware. (Low cost and increased maintainability)
The sequence program controller is built into the machine and, therefore, does not require any
installation space, unlike in conventional systems.
Interfacing with ROBODRILL is at the software level and, therefore, does not require any
signal lines, unlike in conventional systems. You can easily perform more advanced control by
using a variety of interface signals.
You can control external devices by using the terminal block for the ROBODRILL installed as
standard. (16 inputs and 16 outputs)
You can add more additional I/O signals, if required. (Optional)
(2) Variety of software functions
You can display your own alarm and operator messages on the ROBODRILL screen.
LEDs and other indicators for alarms are not required.
Full debugging functions are provided, such as the display of the operating status of created
ladder programs, signal diagnosis, and trace (which displays changes in signal states with the
passage of time).
Parameters such as variable timers and keep relays can be set on the screen.
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
Sequencer
System ladder
program
External device
Custom PMC
Conventional system using a commercially

available sequencer
External device
System using the custom PMC function
-1-
1.OUTLINE
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Independent system ladder program (ROBODRILL controller: first PMC) and custom PMC (jig
controller: second PMC)
You can edit or input and output only custom PMC portions.
You can set any symbols and comments for all addresses. (The symbols and comments that
have been set are displayed when the second PMC is selected. However, they are not displayed
on the parameter and other screens that are common to the first and second PMCs.)
You can enable the display of alarms and messages simply by making message settings only
for the main body of a ladder program. (You can enable the display of the alarms and
messages without having to set message data (separate from the main body of the ladder
program) for the multi-language display function.)
ROBODRILL
System ladder
program
Independent data
Custom PMC
Custom PMC
Custom PMC
Ladder program
section
Ladder program
section
Message
Message
Without multi-language
display function
Can be input and

output individually
Message data for

multi-language display
function
With multi-language display

function
-2-
2.EXPLANATION OF TERMS
B-85314EN-1/01
EXPLANATION OF TERMS
Custom ladder program: Sequence program created by a customer to control jigs and so forth (second
PMC)
System ladder program: Sequence program prepared beforehand to exercise basic control on the
ROBODRILL (first PMC)
PMC:
Hardware system software for performing control, editing, and other
operations on custom and system ladder programs
Soft key:
Twelve buttons displayed at the bottom of the LCD panel
QUICK screen:
Application screen dedicated to ROBODRILL
-3-
3.NOTES
B-85314EN-1/01
NOTES
(1) Make sure that edited custom PMC (second PMC) ladder programs are attached to the machine. In
addition, supply those ladder programs to your FANUC sales or service person.
(2) Do not reference, or write to, addresses other than those specified.
(3) Do not edit the system ladder program (first PMC).
(4) When the I/O module allocation needs to be modified, be familiar with the specifications before
making any addition or change.
(5) Before installing edited custom PMC data in the machine, check the series and edition of the system
ladder program. If the interface signals for use with a newly added system ladder program are used,
the machine may not operate normally when the series and edition of the system ladder program
currently used is older.
(6) Do not use the following functional instructions:
END1 (SUB1), END2 (SUB2), END (SUB64), WINDR (SUB51), SPCNT (SUB46), WINDW
(SUB52), MMCWR (SUB98), MMCWW (SUB99), AXCTL (SUB53)
(7) Before pulling out and inserting a memory card, turn the power OFF.
(8) To use the custom PMC function, set the following PMC parameter bit. (See Chapter 10,
"SETTING PMC PARAMETERS.")
Parameter
Value
K15#7
1
0
Function
Makes the custom PMC function available.
Makes the custom PMC function unavailable.
where K: Keep relay, #7: Seventh bit

(9) The custom PMC function of the D14/21iA5 does not require the ladder edit card. Editing is always
permitted as long as the machine is in the emergency stop state. To disable custom PMC editing,
use the following PMC parameter bit.
Parameter
Value
K14#0
1
0
Function
Disables custom PMC editing.
Enables custom PMC editing.
(10) The M code used with a custom PMC function must always be the first M code.
(11) As ladder editing software for the personal computer, use FANUC LADDER-III Version 6.30 or
later.
(12) The maximum allowable custom PMC program size (flash ROM size) is 128 KB. Not only ladder
programs but also comments and messages consume the memory. Ensure that the maximum
allowable program size is not exceeded.
-4-
4.SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
SPECIFICATIONS
Programming language
Type of program
Number of instructions
Basic instruction processing time
Program size
Maximum allowable program size (Flash ROM size)
Number of usable subprograms
No. of inputs/ outputs
Inputs
Outputs
Internal relay
Message relay
Special auxiliary relay
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table
Non-hold type
Variable
Fixed
Ladder program
Second PMC
14 basic instructions, 84 functional instructions
9.1 nsec /step
Approx. 16000 steps
128 KB
3500
16 as standard
(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 48 by
adding terminal blocks.)
Up to 1024 inputs can be added as options.)
16 as standard
(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 32 by
adding terminal blocks.)
Up to 1024 outputs can be added as options.)
1000 bytes (8000 points)
100 points
80 points
140 points
30 points
1000 bytes/8000 items (if used with an internal relay of the
hold type)
-5-
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5
5.1
B-85314EN-1/01
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
You can use 16 inputs and 16 outputs of standard terminal block XT1.
You can add terminal blocks XTC1 (16 inputs and 16 outputs) and XTC2 (16 inputs) to expand the
number of inputs to up to 48 and that of outputs to up to 32.
To use these inputs and outputs, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.
EXT. INTERFACE, and set "1:FOR CUSTOM PMC" in the input/output signal setting field.
Refer to the "ROBODRILL -D14/21iA5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN)" for details.
Refer to the "ROBODRILL - D14/21iA5 SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN)" for the
specifications of the terminal blocks and connection cables.
Wiring PCB unit: A04B-0102-C210#STA
[DI01]
Terminal block [XTC1]
16 inputs (X0.0 to X1.7)

16 outputs (Y0.0 to Y1.7)
Terminal block [XTC2]
16 inputs (X2.0 to X3.7)
[DI02]
Terminal block [XT1] 16 inputs (X4.0 to X5.7)

16 outputs (Y4.0 to Y5.7)
-6-
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from connector panel PC board to 50-pin terminal block (XT1)
Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm
Name
UDI01
UDI02
UDI03
UDI04
UDI05
UDI06
UDI07
UDI08
Address
X 4.0
X 4.1
X 4.2
X 4.3
X 4.4
X 4.5
X 4.6
X 4.7
Signal
User DI01
User DI02
User DI03
User DI04
User DI05
User DI06
User DI07
User DI08
Destination
XT1-01
XT1-02
XT1-05
XT1-06
XT1-07
XT1-08
XT1-11
XT1-12
UDI09
UDI10
UDI11
UDI12
UDI13
UDI14
UDI15
UDI16
X 5.0
X 5.1
X 5.2
X 5.3
X 5.4
X 5.5
X 5.6
X 5.7
User DI09
User DI10
User DI11
User DI12
User DI13
User DI14
User DI15
User DI16
XT1-13
XT1-14
XT1-17
XT1-18
XT1-19
XT1-20
XT1-23
XT1-24
UDO01
UDO02
UDO03
UDO04
UDO05
UDO06
UDO07
UDO08
Y 2.0
Y 2.1
Y 2.2
Y 2.3
Y 2.4
Y 2.5
Y 2.6
Y 2.7
User DO01
User DO02
User DO03
User DO04
User DO05
User DO06
User DO07
User DO08
XT1-25
XT1-26
XT1-29
XT1-30
XT1-31
XT1-32
XT1-35
XT1-36
UDO09
UDO10
UDO11
UDO12
UDO13
UDO14
UDO15
UDO16
Y 3.0
Y 3.1
Y 3.2
Y 3.3
Y 3.4
Y 3.5
Y 3.6
Y 3.7
User DO09
User DO10
User DO11
User DO12
User DO13
User DO14
User DO15
User DO16
XT1-37
XT1-38
XT1-41
XT1-42
XT1-43
XT1-44
XT1-47
XT1-48
-7-
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
X 4.0
+24E
X 4.2
X 4.4
+24E
X 4.6
X 5.0
+24E
X 5.2
X 5.4
+24E
X 5.6
Y 2.0
0V
Y 2.2
Y 2.4
0V
Y 2.6
Y 3.0
0V
Y 3.2
Y 3.4
0V
Y 3.6
0V
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
X 4.1
+24E
X 4.3
X 4.5
+24E
X 4.7
X 5.1
+24E
X 5.3
X 5.5
+24E
X 5.7
Y 2.1
0V
Y 2.3
Y 2.5
0V
Y 2.7
Y 3.1
0V
Y 3.3
Y 3.5
0V
Y 3.7
+24E
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from DI01 to 50-pin terminal block (XTC1)

Name
UDI17
UDI18
UDI19
UDI20
UDI21
UDI22
UDI23
UDI24
Address
X0.0
X0.1
X0.2
X0.3
X0.4
X0.5
X0.6
X0.7
Signal
User DI17
User DI18
UserDI19
User DI20
User DI21
User DI22
User DI23
User DI24
Destination
XTC1-01
XTC1-02
XTC1-05
XTC1-06
XTC1-07
XTC1-08
XTC1-11
XTC1-12
UDI25
UDI26
UDI27
UDI28
UDI29
UDI30
UDI31
UDI32
X1.0
X1.1
X1.2
X1.3
X1.4
X1.5
X1.6
X1.7
User DI25
User DI26
User DI27
User DI28
User DI29
User DI30
User DI31
User DI32
XTC1-13
XTC1-14
XTC1-17
XTC1-18
XTC1-19
XTC1-20
XTC1-23
XTC1-24
UDO17
UDO18
UDO19
UDO20
UDO21
UDO22
UDO23
UDO24
Y0.0
Y0.1
Y0.2
Y0.3
Y0.4
Y0.5
Y0.6
Y0.7
User DO17
User DO18
User DO19
User DO20
User DO21
User DO22
User DO23
User DO24
XTC1-25
XTC1-26
XTC1-29
XTC1-30
XTC1-31
XTC1-32
XTC1-35
XTC1-36
UDO25
UDO26
UDO27
UDO28
UDO29
UDO30
UDO31
UDO32
Y1.0
Y1.1
Y1.2
Y1.3
Y1.4
Y1.5
Y1.6
Y1.7
User DO25
User DO26
User DO27
User DO28
User DO29
User DO30
User DO31
User DO32
XTC1-37
XTC1-38
XTC1-41
XTC1-42
XTC1-43
XTC1-44
XTC1-47
XTC1-48
-8-
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
X0.0
+24E
X0.2
X0.4
+24E
X0.6
X1.0
+24E
X1.2
X1.4
+24E
X1.6
Y0.0
0V
Y0.2
Y0.4
0V
Y0.6
Y1.0
0V
Y1.2
Y1.4
0V
Y1.6
0V
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
X0.1
+24E
X0.3
X0.5
+24E
X0.7
X1.1
+24E
X1.3
X1.5
+24E
X1.7
Y0.1
0V
Y0.3
Y0.5
0V
Y0.7
Y1.1
0V
Y1.3
Y1.5
0V
Y1.7
+24E
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from DI02 to 34-pin terminal block (XTC2)

Name
UDI33
UDI34
UDI35
UDI36
UDI37
UDI38
UDI39
UDI40
Address
X2.0
X2.1
X2.2
X2.3
X2.4
X2.5
X2.6
X2.7
Signal
User DI33
User DI34
User DI35
User DI36
User DI37
User DI38
User DI39
User DI40
Destination
XTC2-01
XTC2-02
XTC2-05
XTC2-06
XTC2-07
XTC2-08
XTC2-11
XTC2-12
UDI41
UDI42
UDI43
UDI44
UDI45
UDI46
UDI47
UDI48
X3.0
X3.1
X3.2
X3.3
X3.4
X3.5
X3.6
X3.7
User DI41
User DI42
User DI43
User DI44
User DI45
UserDI46
User DI47
User DI48
XTC2-13
XTC2-14
XTC2-17
XTC2-18
XTC2-19
XTC2-20
XTC2-23
XTC2-24
-9-
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
X2.0
+24E
X2.2
X2.4
+24E
X2.6
X3.0
+24E
X3.2
X3.4
+24E
X3.6
+24E
+24E
+24E
0V
0V
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
X2.1
+24E
X2.3
X2.5
+24E
X2.7
X3.1
+24E
X3.3
X3.5
+24E
X3.7
+24E
+24E
0V
0V
0V
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2
OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.1
I/O Unit Model-A
By installing an I/O Unit Model-A, you can add up to 96 inputs and 64 outputs in the case of standard
setting.
The expansion section is in module units, so that you can select the modules that meet your specifications.
You can add up to five modules (two output modules and three input modules).
Vertical type
Interface module
Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with input modules
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules
- 10 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Horizontal type
Input module
Name
AID16C
No. of
signals
16
Slots 4 and 5: for use only

with output modules
Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with

input modules
Interface module
Classificati
on
(Specifications of input/output modules)

Type
Voltage used
Common Shape of connection
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AID16D
16
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
24 V
AID32E1
32
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0/24 V
MR connector made by
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.
AID32E2
32
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0/24 V
Flat cable connector
Output
AOD08C
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
0V
module
AOD08D
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
AOD16C
16
12-24 V d.c.
0V
AOD16D
16
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
AOD32C1
32
12-24 V d.c.
0V
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.
AOD32C2
32
12-24 V d.c.
0V
AOD32D1
32
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.
AOD32D2
32
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
AOR08G
Relay output
250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.

AOR16G
16
Relay output
250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:

Signal classification
Expansion section slot

(see the above figure and the
figure on the previous page)
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal
(up to 96 inputs)
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
16, 32
16, 32
16, 32
8, 16, 32
8, 16, 32
X200.0 to X203.7
X204.0 to X207.7
X208.0 to X211.7
Y200.0 to Y203.7
Y204.0 to Y207.7
Output signal
(up to 64 outputs)
- 11 -
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01
02
02
A0
03
04
A1
04
A2
05
06
A3
08
06
08
A6
09
10
10
B0
11
12
12
B2
13
14
14
B4
15
16
16
B6
17
18
18
19
B5
B6
17
B7
B3
B4
15
B5
B1
B2
13
B3
A7
B0
11
B1
A5
A6
09
A7
A3
A4
07
A5
A1
A2
05
A4
07
A0
03
B7
19
20
20
[AID16C]
[AID16D]
[Address allocation]
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7
X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7
X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7
X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7
X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7
- 12 -
B-85314EN-1/01
50
41
49
40
16
07
A0
C0
32
24
A1
C1
48
39
A2
C2
15
06
A3
C3
31
23
A4
C4
47
38
A5
C5
30
22
A6
C6
46
37
A7
C7
45
36
29
21
12
03
B0
D0
28
20
B1
D1
44
35
B2
D2
11
02
B3
D3
27
19
B4
D4
43
34
B5
D5
10
01
B6
D6
42
33
B7
D7
[AID32E1]
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7
X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7
X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
X 202.0
X 202.1
X 202.2
X 202.3
X 202.4
X 202.5
X 202.6
X 202.7
X 206.0
X 206.1
X 206.2
X 206.3
X 206.4
X 206.5
X 206.6
X 206.7
X 210.0
X 210.1
X 210.2
X 210.3
X 210.4
X 210.5
X 210.6
X 210.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7
X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7
X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
X 203.0
X 203.1
X 203.2
X 203.3
X 203.4
X 203.5
X 203.6
X 203.7
X 207.0
X 207.1
X 207.2
X 207.3
X 207.4
X 207.5
X 207.6
X 207.7
X 211.0
X 211.1
X 211.2
X 211.3
X 211.4
X 211.5
X 211.6
X 211.7
- 13 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B24
B12
A24
A12
B23
B11
A0
C0
A23
A11
A1
C1
B22
B10
A2
C2
A22
A10
A3
C3
B21
B09
A4
C4
A21
A09
A5
C5
B20
B08
A6
C6
A20
A08
A7
C7
B18
B06
A18
A06
B17
B05
B0
D0
A17
A05
B1
D1
B16
B04
B2
D2
A16
A04
B3
D3
B15
B03
B4
D4
A15
A03
B5
D5
B14
B02
B6
D6
A14
A02
B7
D7
[AID32E2]
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7
X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7
X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
X 202.0
X 202.1
X 202.2
X 202.3
X 202.4
X 202.5
X 202.6
X 202.7
X 206.0
X 206.1
X 206.2
X 206.3
X 206.4
X 206.5
X 206.6
X 206.7
X 210.0
X 210.1
X 210.2
X 210.3
X 210.4
X 210.5
X 210.6
X 210.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7
X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7
X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
X 203.0
X 203.1
X 203.2
X 203.3
X 203.4
X 203.5
X 203.6
X 203.7
X 207.0
X 207.1
X 207.2
X 207.3
X 207.4
X 207.5
X 207.6
X 207.7
X 211.0
X 211.1
X 211.2
X 211.3
X 211.4
X 211.5
X 211.6
X 211.7
- 14 -
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
LOAD
05
04
A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
06
LOAD
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
20
A7
19
20
[AOD08C]
[AOD08D]
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A6
17
18
LOAD
A5
15
16
LOAD
A4
13
14
LOAD
A3
11
12
LOAD
A2
09
10
LOAD
A1
07
08
LOAD
A0
05
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
- 15 -
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01
02
LOAD
03
LOAD
LOAD
04
05
LOAD
LOAD
06
07
LOAD
LOAD
08
09
LOAD
10
02
A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
11
04
06
LOAD
14
15
LOAD
LOAD
16
17
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
A3
A4
07
08
A5
A6
09
10
A7
11
13
LOAD
A1
A2
05
12
LOAD
A0
03
18
19
20
12
B0
LOAD
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
[AOD16C]
B0
13
14
B1
B2
15
16
B3
B4
17
18
B5
B6
19
20
B7
[AOD16D]
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
- 16 -
B-85314EN-1/01
50
08
49
07
A0
LOAD
LOAD
24
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
32
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
C5
22
30
C6
37
A7
LOAD
C4
38
47
LOAD
C3
23
31
LOAD
C2
06
15
LOAD
C1
39
48
LOAD
C0
LOAD
16
C7
LOAD
46
40
50
41
13
04
12
LOAD
03
B0
LOAD
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
28
LOAD
44
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
D5
LOAD
01
B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
42
LOAD
D4
34
10
LOAD
D3
19
43
LOAD
D2
02
27
LOAD
D1
35
11
LOAD
D0
20
D6
33
D7
29
21
45
36
[AOD32C1]
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7
Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7
Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
- 17 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B19
B07
B23
B11
A0
LOAD
A11
A1
LOAD
B10
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A22
LOAD
A4
A09
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
C5
B08
A20
C6
A08
A7
LOAD
C4
LOAD
B20
LOAD
C3
B09
A21
LOAD
C2
A10
B21
LOAD
C1
LOAD
B22
LOAD
C0
LOAD
A23
C7
LOAD
A24
A12
B24
B12
B13
B01
B17
B05
B0
LOAD
A17
LOAD
A05
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B16
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5
B02
B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
A14
LOAD
D4
A03
B14
LOAD
D3
B03
A15
LOAD
D2
A04
B15
LOAD
D1
B04
A16
LOAD
D0
LOAD
D6
A02
D7
A18
A06
B18
B06
[AOD32C2]
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7
Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7
Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
- 18 -
B-85314EN-1/01
50
41
49
40
16
LOAD
07
A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
32
LOAD
48
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
C5
LOAD
22
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
46
LOAD
C4
38
30
LOAD
C3
23
47
LOAD
C2
06
31
LOAD
C1
39
15
LOAD
C0
24
C6
37
C7
18
09
45
36
29
21
12
03
B0
LOAD
LOAD
20
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
44
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5
01
B6
D6
LOAD
42
33
B7
LOAD
D4
34
10
LOAD
D3
19
43
LOAD
D2
02
27
LOAD
D1
35
11
LOAD
D0
LOAD
28
D7
LOAD
14
05
[AOD32D1]
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7
Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7
Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
- 19 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B24
B12
A24
A12
B23
LOAD
B11
A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A23
LOAD
B22
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
C5
LOAD
B08
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
A20
LOAD
C4
A09
B20
LOAD
C3
B09
A21
LOAD
C2
A10
B21
LOAD
C1
B10
A22
LOAD
C0
A11
C6
A08
C7
A19
A07
B18
B06
A18
A06
B17
B05
B0
LOAD
LOAD
A05
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B16
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5
B02
B6
D6
LOAD
A14
A02
B7
LOAD
D4
A03
B14
LOAD
D3
B03
A15
LOAD
D2
A04
B15
LOAD
D1
B04
A16
LOAD
D0
LOAD
A17
D7
LOAD
A13
A01
[AOD32D2]
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7
Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7
Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
- 20 -
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01
V
02
V
03
LOAD
A1
A2
LOAD
LOAD
A3
LOAD
11
13
LOAD
LOAD
A5
17
A6
LOAD
19
09
A7
LOAD
20
A5
A6
10
A7
11
12
13
B0
B1
14
15
B2
B3
16
17
LOAD
18
A4
08
LOAD
16
A3
07
LOAD
LOAD
15
LOAD
A4
14
LOAD
LOAD
A2
06
12
V
05
LOAD
10
A0
A1
04
LOAD
08
09
03
LOAD
06
07
02
LOAD
LOAD
05
LOAD
A0
04
LOAD
LOAD
B4
18
19
B5
B6
20
B7
LOAD
[AOR08G]
[AOR16G]
AOR08G
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Slot 4
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
AOR16G
Slot 5
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
- 21 -
Slot 4
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7
Slot 5
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7
5.2.2
B-85314EN-1/01
I/O Link Connection Unit

Signal address
Input signal (128 inputs)

Output signal (128 outputs)
5.2.3
X212.0 to X227.7
Y212.0 to Y227.7
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel

Connector on I/O module
No. of signals
Signal address
CE56
CE57
CE56
CE57
24
24
16
16
X240.0 to X242.7
X243.0 to X245.7
Y240.0 to Y241.7
Y242.0 to Y243.7
Connector table
CE56
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CE57
A
0V
X240.0
X240.2
X240.4
X240.6
X241.0
X241.2
X241.4
X241.6
X242.0
X242.2
X242.4
X242.6
DICOM0
B
+24A
X240.1
X240.3
X240.5
X240.7
X241.1
X241.3
X241.5
X241.7
X242.1
X242.3
X242.5
X242.7
Y240.0
Y240.2
Y240.4
Y240.6
Y241.0
Y241.2
Y241.4
Y241.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
Y240.1
Y240.3
Y240.5
Y240.7
Y241.1
Y241.3
Y241.5
Y241.7
DOCOM
DOCOM
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
0V
X243.0
X243.2
X243.4
X243.6
X244.0
X244.2
X244.4
X244.6
X245.0
X245.2
X245.4
X245.6
B
+24A
X243.1
X243.3
X243.5
X243.7
X244.1
X244.3
X244.5
X244.7
X245.1
X245.3
X245.5
X245.7
DICOM5
Y242.0
Y242.2
Y242.4
Y242.6
Y243.0
Y243.2
Y243.4
Y243.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
Y242.1
Y242.3
Y242.5
Y242.7
Y243.1
Y243.3
Y243.5
Y243.7
DOCOM
DOCOM
Note) +24A on CE56-B01 and CE57-B01 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB.
Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
- 22 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (1)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691
+24A
CPD1
(01)
+24A
(02)
0V
CE56
(B01)
(A01)
X240.0
X240.1
X240.2
X240.3
X240.4
X240.5
X240.6
X240.7
(A02)
RV
(B02)
RV
(A03)
RV
(B03)
RV
(A04)
RV
(B04)
RV
(A05)
RV
(B05)
RV
(A14)
(DICOM0)
X241.0
X241.1
(B06)
RV
X241.2
RV
X241.3
RV
X241.4
RV
X241.5
RV
X241.6
RV
X241.7
(A06)
RV
(A07)
(B07)
(A08)
(B08)
(A09)
(B09)
RV
- 23 -
B-85314EN-1/01
X242.0
RV
X242.1
RV
X242.2
X242.3
X242.4
CE56
(A10)
(B10)
(A11)
RV
(B11)
RV
(A12)
RV
X242.5
RV
X242.6
RV
X242.7
RV
(B12)
(A13)
(B13)
- 24 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (2)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691
+24A
CPD1
(01)
+24A
(02)
0V
CE57
(B01)
(A01)
X243.0
X243.1
X243.2
X243.3
X243.4
X243.5
X243.6
(B02)
RV
(A03)
RV
(B03)
RV
(A04)
RV
(B04)
RV
(A05)
RV
X243.7
RV
X244.0
RV
X244.1
RV
X244.2
RV
X244.3
RV
X244.4
RV
X244.5
RV
X244.6
RV
X244.7
(A02)
RV
(B05)
(A06)
(B06)
(A07)
(B07)
(A08)
(B08)
(A09)
(B09)
RV
- 25 -
B-85314EN-1/01
X245.0
RV
X245.1
RV
X245.2
X245.3
X245.4
CE57
(A10)
(B10)
(A11)
RV
(B11)
RV
(A12)
RV
X245.5
RV
X245.6
RV
X245.7
RV
(B12)
(A13)
(B13)
(B14)
(DICOM5)
NOTE
X240.0 through X240.7 and X245.0 through X245.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0
CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24V d.c. power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is
connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal.
To prevent this from occurring,the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and
DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0V power supply is recommended whereever
possible.For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common
voltage is fixed, the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for
which a common voltage can be selected, the input is 0 when the DICOMx
common select pin is connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is
connected to the +24 V d.c. power supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5
when used. When addresses from X240.0 to X240.7 and X245.0 to X245.7 are
not used, connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 to the 0V power supply.
- 26 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals

(1)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691
DOCOM
CE56
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)
24V d.c. EXTERNAL

POWER SUPPLY
V+ 0V
0V
Y240.0
(A16)
DV
Y240.1
DV
(B16)
Y240.2
DV
(A17)
DV
(B17)
DV
(A18)
DV
(B18)
DV
(A19)
DV
(B19)
DV
(A20)
DV
(B20)
DV
(A21)
DV
(B21)
DV
(A22)
DV
(B22)
DV
(A23)
DV
(B23)
Y240.3
Y240.4
Y240.5
Y240.6
Y240.7
Y241.0
Y241.1
Y241.2
Y241.3
Y241.4
Y241.5
Y241.6
Y241.7
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.

It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.
- 27 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals

(2)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691
DOCOM
CE57
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)
24V d.c. EXTERNAL

POWER SUPPLY
V+ 0V
0V
Y242.0
(A16)
DV
Y242.1
DV
(B16)
Y242.2
DV
(A17)
DV
(B17)
DV
(A18)
DV
(B18)
DV
(A19)
DV
(B19)
DV
(A20)
DV
(B20)
DV
(A21)
DV
(B21)
DV
(A22)
DV
(B22)
DV
(A23)
DV
(B23)
Y242.3
Y242.4
Y242.5
Y242.6
Y242.7
Y243.0
Y243.1
Y243.2
Y243.3
Y243.4
Y243.5
Y243.6
Y243.7
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.

It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.
- 28 -
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2.3.1
Terminal Module B
This module is connected to additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel to relay input/output signals
via a screw terminal block. Up to two terminal modules can be mounted.
Terminal Module
No. of signals
Signal address
1st module (#1)

2nd module (#2)
24
24
X240.0 to X242.7
X243.0 to X245.7
1st module (#1)

2nd module (#2)
16
16
Y240.0 to Y241.7
Y242.0 to Y243.7
Wiring PCB
A16B-1110-0520
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
24V d.c. external

power supply
(DOCOM)
CE56
CE70
24 inputs
(X240.0 to X242.7)
16 outputs
(Y240.0 to Y241.7)
Terminal module B#1

A03B-0815-C022
CE70
CE57
24V d.c. power supply

from Wriing PCB (+24A)
CPD1
24 inputs
(X243.0 to X245.7)
16 outputs
(Y242.0 to Y243.7)
Terminal module B#2

A03B-0815-C022
I/O module
A20B-2002-0691
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2. It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.
- 29 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Pin layout of terminal module B (#1) [Connection between CE56 and CE70]
CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
0V
X240.0
X240.2
X240.4
X240.6
X241.0
X241.2
X241.4
X241.6
X242.0
X242.2
X242.4
X242.6
DICOM0
Y240.0
Y240.2
Y240.4
Y240.6
Y241.0
Y241.2
Y241.4
Y241.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
+24A
X240.1
X240.3
X240.5
X240.7
X241.1
X241.3
X241.5
X241.7
X242.1
X242.3
X242.5
X242.7
Y240.1
Y240.3
Y240.5
Y240.7
Y241.1
Y241.3
Y241.5
Y241.7
DOCOM
DOCOM
XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0V
DICOM0
X240.2
X240.3
DICOM0
X240.6
X240.7
+24A
X241.2
X241.3
+24A
X241.6
X241.7
+24A
X242.2
X242.3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
0V
DICOM0
X240.0
X240.1
DICOM0
X240.4
X240.5
+24A
X241.0
X241.1
+24A
X241.4
X241.5
+24A
X242.0
X242.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+24A
X242.6
X242.7
0V
Y240.2
Y240.3
0V
Y240.6
Y240.7
0V
Y241.2
Y241.3
0V
Y241.6
Y241.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24A
X242.4
X242.5
0V
Y240.0
Y240.1
0V
Y240.4
Y240.5
0V
Y241.0
Y241.1
0V
Y241.4
Y241.5
DOCOM
NOTE
+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power
supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but
no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2.
As for DICOM0, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 30 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Pin layout of terminal module B (#2) [Connection between CE57 and CE70]
CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
0V
X243.0
X243.2
X243.4
X243.6
X244.0
X244.2
X244.4
X244.6
X245.0
X245.2
X245.4
X245.6
Y242.0
Y242.2
Y242.4
Y242.6
Y243.0
Y243.2
Y243.4
Y243.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
+24A
X243.1
X243.3
X243.5
X243.7
X244.1
X244.3
X244.5
X244.7
X245.1
X245.3
X245.5
X245.7
DICOM5
Y242.1
Y242.3
Y242.5
Y242.7
Y243.1
Y243.3
Y243.5
Y243.7
DOCOM
DOCOM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0V
DICOM5
X243.2
X243.3
DICOM5
X243.6
X243.7
+24A
X244.2
X244.3
+24A
X244.6
X244.7
+24A
X245.2
X245.3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
0V
DICOM5
X243.0
X243.1
DICOM5
X243.4
X243.5
+24A
X244.0
X244.1
+24A
X244.4
X244.5
+24A
X245.0
X245.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+24A
X245.6
X245.7
0V
Y242.2
Y242.3
0V
Y242.6
Y242.7
0V
Y243.2
Y243.3
0V
Y243.6
Y243.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24A
X245.4
X245.5
0V
Y242.0
Y242.1
0V
Y242.4
Y242.5
0V
Y243.0
Y243.1
0V
Y243.4
Y243.5
DOCOM
NOTE
+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power
supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but
no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2.
As for DICOM5, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 31 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #1

I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24A
Wiring PCB
CPD1
(01)
(02)
XS09
(A05)
(B05)
+24A
Terminal module B#1
CE70
(B01)
(A01)
CE56
(B01)
(A01)
+24
X240.1
X240.2
X240.3
X240.4
X240.5
X240.6
X240.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
(A02)
(A02)
(B02)
(B02)
(A03)
(A03)
(B03)
(B03)
(A04)
(A04)
(B04)
(B04)
(A05)
(A05)
(B05)
(B05)
(23)
(5)
(6)
(7)
X241.1
X241.2
X241.3
X241.4
X241.5
X241.6
X241.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
XB2
0V
(A14)
(A14)
(A06)
(A06)
(B06)
(B06)
(A07)
(A07)
(B07)
(B07)
(A08)
(A08)
(B08)
(B08)
(A09)
(A09)
(29)
(11)
(12)
(B09)
(B09)
(13)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)
+24A
X241.0
XT70A
(18)
(19)
(4)
(21)
(22)
+24
DICOM0
0V
(20)
(2)
(3)
- 32 -
0V
X240.0
XB1
B-85314EN-1/01
Terminal module B#1
+24A
X242.0
X242.1
X242.2
X242.3
X242.4
X242.5
X242.6
X242.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
CE56
(A10)
CE70
(A10)
XT70A
(30)
(31)
(B10)
(B10)
(32)
(A11)
(A11)
(14)
(15)
(B11)
(B11)
(A12)
(A12)
(16)
XT70B
(17)
(18)
(B12)
(B12)
(19)
(A13)
(A13)
(1)
(2)
(B13)
(B13)
(3)
NOTE
X240.0 to X240.7 are DI pins that allows common signal selection. Specifically,
when setting terminal XB1 is set to 0 V and setting terminal XB2 is set to +24,
and DICOM0 is connected to 24V d.c., DI signals with logic inverted can be
input. In this case, if a cable ground-fault accident occurs, a state equivalent to
the DI signal ON state is observed. From the point of view of safety, setting
terminal XB1 should be set to +24 and XB2 be set to 0 V, where possible, so
that 0 V is applied to DICOM0.
- 33 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2

+24A
Wiring PCB
CPD1
(01)
(02)
XS09
(A05)
(B05)
+24A
Terminal module B#2
CE70
(B01)
(A01)
CE57
(B01)
(A01)
X243.2
X243.3
X243.4
X243.5
X243.6
X243.7
X244.0
X244.1
X244.2
X244.3
X244.4
X244.5
X244.6
X244.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
(A02)
(A02)
(B02)
(B02)
(A03)
(A03)
(B03)
(B03)
(A04)
(A04)
(B04)
(B04)
(A05)
(A05)
(23)
XT70B(1)
XT70A(6)
(B05)
(B05)
(7)
(A06)
(A06)
(24)
(25)
(B06)
(B06)
(A07)
(A07)
(B07)
(B07)
(A08)
(A08)
(B08)
(B08)
(A09)
(A09)
(29)
(11)
(12)
(B09)
(B09)
(13)
(20)
(14)
(3)
(4)
XT70B(17)
XT70A(22)
(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)
- 34 -
0V
X243.1
RV
+24A
X243.0
XT70A
(30)
(19)
B-85314EN-1/01
+24
X245.0
X245.1
X245.2
X245.3
X245.4
X245.5
X245.6
X245.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
XB1
0V
CE57
(A10)
CE70
(A10)
XT70A
(18)
(31)
(B10)
(B10)
(32)
(A11)
(A11)
(2)
(15)
(B11)
(B11)
(16)
(A12)
(A12)
(21)
XT70B(18)
(B12)
(B12)
(19)
(A13)
(A13)
XT70A(5)
XT70B(2)
(B13)
(B13)
(3)
+24
DICOM5
0V
+24A
Terminal module B#2
XB2
0V
(B14)
(B14)
NOTE
X245.0 to X245.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to
"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM5 to 24V d.c., the logic of the DI signal
can be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the
cable, the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we
recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM5
to 0V whenever possible.
- 35 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Output signal (DO) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2 address enclosed in ()
DOCOM
CE56, (CE57)
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)
CE70
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)
0V
Terminal module B#1(#2)
XT70B
(32)
(16)
XT70A
(1)(17)
XT70B
(20)
(A16)
(A16)
(21)
DV
(B16)
(B16)
Y240.2 (Y242.2)
DV
(A17)
(A17)
(22)
(4)
(5)
Y240.3 (Y243.3)
DV
(B17)
(B17)
DV
(A18)
(A18)
DV
(B18)
(B18)
DV
(A19)
(A19)
(25)
(7)
(8)
DV
(B19)
(B19)
(9)
DV
(A20)
(A20)
(26)
(27)
DV
(B20)
(B20)
DV
(A21)
(A21)
DV
(B21)
(B21)
DV
(A22)
(A22)
DV
(B22)
(B22)
DV
(A23)
(A23)
(31)
(13)
(14)
DV
(B23)
(B23)
(15)
Y240.0 (Y242.0)
External 24 VDC
power supply
()
()
Relay
DV
Y240.1 (Y242.1)
Y240.4 (Y242.4)
Y240.5 (Y242.5)
Y240.6 (Y242.6)
Y240.7 (Y242.7)
Y241.0 (Y243.0)
Y241.1 (Y243.1)
Y241.2 (Y243.2)
Y241.3 (Y243.3)
Y241.4 (Y243.3)
Y241.5 (Y243.5)
Y241.6 (Y243.6)
Y241.7 (Y243.7)
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2.

It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.
- 36 -
(6)
(23)
(24)
(28)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(29)
(30)
Relay
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2.4
Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)
I/O modules, terminal modules, and connection cables can be used to relay input/output signals via a
screw terminal block. You can expand the number of inputs to up to 96 and the number of outputs to up
to 64.
Signal
classification
I/O module
Terminal module
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal
(96 inputs)
I/O module B1
1st I/O module E1 (#1)
2nd I/O module E1 (#2)
3rd I/O module E1 (#3)
1st module (#1)

2nd module (#2)
3rd module (#3)
4th module (#4)
24
24
24
24
X228.0 to X230.7
X231.0 to X233.7
X234.0 to X236.7
X237.0 to X239.7
Output signal
(64 outputs)
I/O module B1
1st module (#1)

2nd module (#2)
3rd module (#3)
4th module (#4)
16
16
16
16
Y228.0 to Y229.7
Y230.0 to Y231.7
Y232.0 to Y233.7
Y234.0 to Y235.7
Wiring PCB
I/O Link cable
A16B-1110-0520
JD1A
Inter-module connection cable
JD1B
XP150
CB150
CA52
I/O module B1
A03B-0824-C001
Flat cables
Terminal module #1
A03B-0815-C020
CA53
XP150
CB150
CA52
Terminal module #2
A03B-0815-C020

A03B-0824-C003
CA53
XP150
CB150
CA52
A03B-0824-C003
Terminal module #3
A03B-0815-C020
CA53
XP150
CB150
CA52
Terminal module #4
A03B-0815-C020

A03B-0824-C003
- 37 -
24 V d.c. external power supply 1

24 V d.c. external power supply 2
(Both are additionally required.)
24 inputs
(X228.0 to X230.7)
16 outputs
(Y228.0 to Y229.7)
24 inputs
(X231.0 to X233.7)
16 outputs
(Y230.0 to Y231.7)
24 inputs
(X234.0 to X236.7)
16 outputs
(Y232.0 to Y233.7)
24 inputs
(X237.0 to X239.7)
16 outputs
(Y234.0 to Y235.7)
B-85314EN-1/01
Mounting diagram
Flat cables
I/O module B1
A03B-0824-C001

A03B-0824-C003

A03B-0824-C003
- 38 -

A03B-0824-C003
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #1 connected to I/O module B1

XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y229.1
Y228.1
0V
Y229.3
Y228.3
0V
Y229.5
Y228.5
X229.0
Y229.7
Y228.7
X229.2
X230.1
X228.1
X229.4
X230.3
X228.3
X229.6
X230.5
X228.5
X230.7
X228.7
B1
Y229.0
B2
Y228.0
B3
0V
B4
Y229.2
B5
Y228.2
B6
0V
B7
Y229.4
B8
Y228.4
B9 DICOM0
B10 Y229.6
B11 Y228.6
B12 X229.1
B13 X230.0
B14 X228.0
B15 X229.3
B16 X230.2
B17 X228.2
B18 X229.5
B19 X230.4
B20 X228.4
B21 X229.7
B22 X230.6
B23 X228.6
B24 +24V1
B25 +24V1
Number of signals and addresses

24 inputs (X228.0 to X230.7)
16 outputs (Y228.0 to Y229.7)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0V
DICOM
X228.2
X228.3
DICOM
X228.6
X228.7
+24V2
X229.2
X229.3
+24V2
X229.6
X229.7
+24V2
X230.2
X230.3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DICOM
X228.0
X228.1
DICOM
X228.4
X228.5
+24V2
X229.0
X229.1
+24V2
X229.4
X229.5
+24V2
X230.0
X230.1
+24V2
X230.6
X230.7
0V
Y228.2
Y228.3
0V
Y228.6
Y228.7
0V
Y229.2
Y229.3
0V
Y229.6
Y229.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
X230.4
X230.5
0V
Y228.0
Y228.1
0V
Y228.4
Y228.5
0V
Y229.0
Y229.1
0V
Y229.4
Y229.5
+24V1
NOTE
+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,
and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.
+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are
signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2.
As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 39 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #2 connected to 1st I/O module E1 (#1)

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y231.1
Y230.1
0V
Y231.3
Y230.3
0V
Y231.5
Y230.5
X232.0
Y231.7
Y230.7
X232.2
X233.1
X231.1
X232.4
X233.3
X231.3
X232.6
X233.5
X231.5
X233.7
X231.7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
Y231.0
Y230.0
0V
Y231.2
Y230.2
0V
Y231.4
Y230.4
DICOM0
Y231.6
Y230.6
X232.1
X233.0
X231.0
X232.3
X233.2
X231.2
X232.5
X233.4
X231.4
X232.7
X233.6
X231.6
+24V1
+24V1

24 inputs (X231.0 to X233.7)
16 outputs (Y230.0 to Y231.7)

17
1
0V
18
2 DICOM
19
3 X231.2
20
4 X231.3
21
5 DICOM
22
6 X231.6
23
7 X231.7
24
8 +24V2
25
9 X232.2
26
10 X232.3
27
11 +24V2
28
12 X232.6
29
13 X232.7
30
14 +24V2
31
15 X233.2
32
16 X233.3
+24V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DICOM
X231.0
X231.1
DICOM
X231.4
X231.5
+24V2
X232.0
X232.1
+24V2
X232.4
X232.5
+24V2
X233.0
X233.1
+24V2
X233.6
X233.7
0V
Y230.2
Y230.3
0V
Y230.6
Y230.7
0V
Y231.2
Y231.3
0V
Y231.6
Y231.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
X233.4
X233.5
0V
Y230.0
Y230.1
0V
Y230.4
Y230.5
0V
Y231.0
Y231.1
0V
Y231.4
Y231.5
+24V1
NOTE
- 40 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #3 connected to 2nd I/O module E1 (#2)

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y233.1
Y232.1
0V
Y233.3
Y232.3
0V
Y233.5
Y232.5
X235.0
Y233.7
Y232.7
X234.2
X236.1
X234.1
X235.4
X236.3
X234.3
X235.6
X236.5
X234.5
X236.7
X234.7
B1 Y233.0
B2 Y232.0
B3
0V
B4 Y233.2
B5 Y232.2
B6
0V
B7 Y233.4
B8 Y232.4
B9 DICOM0
B10 Y233.6
B11 Y232.6
B12 X235.1
B13 X236.0
B14 X234.0
B15 X235.3
B16 X236.2
B17 X234.2
B18 X235.5
B19 X236.4
B20 X234.4
B21 X235.7
B22 X236.6
B23 X234.6
B24 +24V1
B25 +24V1

24 inputs (X234.0 to X236.7)
16 outputs (Y232.0 to Y233.7)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0V
DICOM
X234.2
X234.3
DICOM
X234.6
X234.7
+24V2
X235.2
X235.3
+24V2
X235.6
X235.7
+24V2
X236.2
X236.3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DICOM
X234.0
X234.1
DICOM
X234.4
X234.5
+24V2
X235.0
X235.1
+24V2
X235.4
X235.5
+24V2
X236.0
X236.1
+24V2
X236.6
X236.7
0V
Y232.2
Y232.3
0V
Y232.6
Y232.7
0V
Y233.2
Y233.3
0V
Y233.6
Y233.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
X236.4
X236.5
0V
Y232.0
Y232.1
0V
Y232.4
Y232.5
0V
Y233.0
Y233.1
0V
Y233.4
Y233.5
+24V1
NOTE
- 41 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #4 connected to 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y235.1
Y234.1
0V
Y235.3
Y234.3
0V
Y235.5
Y234.5
X238.0
Y235.7
Y234.7
X238.2
X239.1
X237.1
X238.4
X239.3
X237.3
X238.6
X239.5
X237.5
X239.7
X237.7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
Y235.0
Y234.0
0V
Y235.2
Y234.2
0V
Y235.4
Y234.4
DICOM0
Y235.6
Y234.6
X238.1
X239.0
X237.0
X238.3
X239.2
X237.2
X238.5
X239.4
X237.4
X238.7
X239.6
X237.6
+24V1
+24V1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0V
DICOM
X237.2
X237.3
DICOM
X237.6
X237.7
+24V2
X238.2
X238.3
+24V2
X238.6
X238.7
+24V2
X239.2
X239.3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

24 inputs (X237.0 to X239.7)
16 outputs (Y234.0 to Y235.7)
+24V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DICOM
X237.0
X237.1
DICOM
X237.4
X237.5
+24V2
X238.0
X238.1
+24V2
X238.4
X238.5
+24V2
X239.0
X239.1
+24V2
X239.6
X239.7
0V
Y234.2
Y234.3
0V
Y234.6
Y234.7
0V
Y235.2
Y235.3
0V
Y235.6
Y235.7
0V
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+24V2
X239.4
X239.5
0V
Y234.0
Y234.1
0V
Y234.4
Y234.5
0V
Y235.0
Y235.1
0V
Y235.4
Y235.5
+24V1
NOTE
- 42 -
B-85314EN-1/01
< Input signal (DI) circuit diagram >

Connector panel I/O module
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Terminal module
XP150
XT150B
(B24)
(32)
(B25)
XB1
0V XT150A
+24
(17)
(42)
(B14)
(43)
(A17)
(44)
(B17)
(45)
(A20)
(46)
(B20)
(47)
(A23)
(48)
(B23)
(49)
(A25)
(18)
(19)
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
+24V2
(7)
XB2
0V
(24)
(B09)
(25)
(A12)
(26)
(B12)
(27)
(A15)
(28)
(B15)
(29)
(A18)
(30)
(B18)
(31)
(A21)
(29)
(11)
(12)
(32)
(B21)
(13)
(19),(20),
(21),(22),
(23)
(A03),(B03),
(A06),(B06),
(A09)
XT150A (1),
XT150B (16)
- 43 -
0V
DC24V Power 2
(23)
(5)
(6)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)
+24V2
Xm+1.0
+24V1
(4)
(21)
(22)
+24
DICOM0
DC24V Power 1
(20)
(2)
(3)
0V
+24V1
CB150
(18)
(50)
0V
B-85314EN-1/01
Terminal module
+24V2
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
XP150
(B13)
XT150A
(30)
(31)
(11)
(A16)
(32)
(12)
(B16)
(14)
(15)
(13)
(A19)
(14)
(B19)
(16)
XT150B
(17)
(18)
(15)
(A22)
(19)
(16)
(B22)
(1)
(2)
(17)
(A24)
(3)
+24V2
Xm+2.7
RV
CB150
(10)
Basic module:
Xm = 228
Expansion module 1:Xm = 231
NOTE
Xm+0.1 to Xm+0.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to
"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM to +24V, the logic of the DI signal can
be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the cable,
the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we
recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM to
0V whenever possible.
The setting terminals are factory-set as follows:
Setting terminal XB1: +24
Setting terminal XB2: 0V
- 44 -
B-85314EN-1/01
< Output signal (DO) circuit diagram >
+24V2
+24V2
0V
Terminal module
CB150
(01),(33)
XP150
(A01),(A02)
(34)
(B02)
(21)
DV
(35)
(A05)
DV
(36)
(B05)
(22)
(4)
(5)
DV
(37)
(A08)
DV
(38)
(B08)
DV
(39)
(A11)
DV
(40)
(B11)
(25)
(7)
(8)
DV
(41)
(A14)
(9)
DV
(02)
(B01)
(26)
(27)
DV
(03)
(A04)
DV
(04)
(B04)
DV
(05)
(A07)
DV
(06)
(B07)
DV
(07)
(A10)
DV
(08)
(B10)
(31)
(13)
(14)
DV
(09)
(A13)
(15)
Yn+0.0
XT150B
(20)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
Basic module:
Yn = 228
Expansion module 1:Yn = 230
- 45 -
(6)
(23)
(24)
(28)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(29)
(30)
Relay
5.2.5
B-85314EN-1/01
Optional I/O Module Connection

JD1A
Wiring PCB
Optional I/O modules must be connected in series by using the I/O Link interface. Connect the modules
in the following sequence:
In the case of standard setting, connect the modules in the sequence indicated below.
Wiring PCB: JD1A
|
Group 0: I/O Unit Model-A
|
Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit
|
Group 2: Additional I/O-1
|
Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operators Panel
Example: I/O Link Connection Unit and additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel.
Wiring PCB: JD1A
|
Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit
|
Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operators Panel
Connect the modules in the ascending order of group numbers starting from the connector panel.
Unused modules need not be connected.
5.2.6
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used
When using optional I/O modules, set the following parameters:

K932#0=1 I/O Unit Model-A
K932#1=1 I/O Link connection unit
K932#2=1 Additional I/O-1
K932#3=1 Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel
SUPPLEMENT
The screen for setting keep relays in the nine hundreds can be displayed by
pressing the emergency stop button.
- 46 -
6.ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC
B-85314EN-1/01
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM

PMC
The following addresses are available to custom PMC.

Address
type
Symbol
---
---
Function
Input from external device to
custom PMC
Output from custom PMC to
external device
Work register
Input from system ladder
program to custom PMC
Output from custom PMC to
system ladder program
Alarm operator message
display request
Non-volatile memory (allows
setting of parameters)
Non-volatile register (allows
setting of parameters)
R
SI**_*
SO**_*
A
---
---
---
Editing
Input only
Input and output
Input and output
Input only
Address
X0.0 to X5.7 (CH1)
X200.0 to X327.7 (CH2)
Y0.0 to Y3.7 (CH1)
Y200.0 to Y327.7 (CH2)
R2000.0-R2999.7
See Chapter 12.
Input and output

Input and output
A100.0 to A149.7
Input and output
D7000 to D7999
D7000.0 to D7999.7
K35#0 to K44#7
Input and output
Timers and counters can use the following numbers.

Timer/Counter
Timer
No.
Variable timer
Fixed timer
121 to 200 (T240 to T398)

1 to 140
40 to 69 (C156 to C274)
Counter
The following subprogram numbers can be used:

Subprogram number
P1500 to P5000
The following special auxiliary relay numbers can be used:

Common to DIFU/DIFD
1 to 100
- 47 -
7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
B-85314EN-1/01
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
To input alphabetic characters, use the corresponding soft keys (in the case of the standard operator's
panel)
Press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel.
Press
Soft keys are displayed as follows.
[In half mode]
O
<
>
FULL
ABC/
abc
ALTER
DELETE
[In full mode]

A
SPACE
<
>
&
"
'
HALF
ABC/
abc
ALTER
DELETE
Use the rightmost and leftmost soft keys to change the alphabetic characters.
- 48 -
7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
B-85314EN-1/01
To switch between half and full modes, use the procedure below.
[Switch from half mode to full mode]
N
FULL
ABC/
abc
ALTER
DELETE
ALTER
DELETE
Press
[Switch from full mode to half mode]
:
HALF
ABC/
abc
Press
Press
To leave alphabetic character input mode, press the <alphabetic letter input> key again on the operator's
panel.
- 49 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
EDITING
You can edit ladder and other programs on the PMC screen.
CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. When editing
ladder programs, messages, symbols, comments, and so forth, check that "2ND
PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
Never perform editing or deleting with the first PMC.
8.1
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION
[Turn the power ON]
[Press the emergency stop button]
[Display the PMC screen]

(If the QUICK screen is displayed, press the <QUICK/NC> button on the
operator's panel to display the CNC screen.)
Display the CNC SYSTEM-SYSTEM screen.
or
Press the above keys:
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times until the following soft keys are displayed:
Each soft key corresponds to functions as listed below. Display a desired screen.
PMC MAINTE:
PMC LADDER:
PMC CONFIG:
Displays the signal status, and sets the trace function and PMC parameters.
Lists and edits a ladder program.
Lists and edits titles, messages, and comments.
- 50 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
8.2
EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS
8.2.1
Switching to the Edit Screen
[Switch to the ladder diagram screen]

Press soft key [PMC LADDER].
Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if
necessary.)
Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 51 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Select the edit area]

Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) by using the cursor keys on the operator's panel then press the
soft key [ZOOM].
If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key
[LADDER].
- 52 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR]

To switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR, press soft key [EDIT] on PMC LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR. (The [EDIT] key is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)
8.2.2
Editing Ladder Programs
Ladder programs may be created between "SUB71" and "SUB72".
May be created in
this area.
Press the rightmost soft key [+] to change the displayed soft keys.
CAUTION
Never delete or edit functional instructions "SUB71" and "SUB72".
Do not create ladder programs outside the "SUB71" to "SUB72" area.
- 53 -
8.EDITING
Soft key
LIST
SEARCH MENU
CREATE
ZOOM
CREATE NET
AUTO
SELECT
DELETE
CUT
COPY
PASTE
CHANGE ADRS
ADRS MAP
UPDATE
RESTRE
SCREEN SETING
START/STOP
CANCEL EDIT
EXIT EDIT
B-85314EN-1/01
Menu on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

Function
Lists ladder programs. (Not used.)
Displays the search menu in the soft key area.
Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to add a new net at the cursor position.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder
program. If the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program will
be executed immediately.
Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to edit the net at the cursor position.
Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter numbers.
Used to specify more than one net to perform an edit operation such as [DELETE], [CUT],
and [COPY]. Press soft key [SELECT] to specify the start of the range to be selected, then
use the cursor movement keys or the search function to specify the end of the range. After
selecting nets, press the desired edit soft key to perform that edit operation.
Deletes a selected net. When deleted, the net will be lost. If you want to restore the deleted
net, you must use soft key [RESTRE] to return the entire ladder program to the state in which
it was before the edit operation.
Removes a selected net and places it in the clipboard. To paste the net, use soft key
[PASTE].
Makes a copy of a selected net and place it in the clipboard. To paste the copy, use soft key
[PASTE].
Inserts the net placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY] at the cursor position.
Pressing soft key [PASTE] when a net is selected with [SELECT] causes the selected net to
be replaced by the one placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY].
Displays the address conversion soft keys to use the address conversion function.
Calls the ADDRESS MAP screen to check the reference of the used addresses.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder
program. When the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program
will be executed immediately.
Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to
the state in which it was when the system switched to the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen or to the state in which it was when [UPDATE] was last used. After having performed
a wrong edit operation, you can use this key if recovery is difficult to accomplish.
Calls the setup screen of the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. You can change
various types of settings related to ladder diagram edit operations.
Controls the execution of the ladder program. Soft key [RUN] starts the execution of the
ladder program, and soft key [STOP] stops its execution.
Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to
the state in which it was when the system switched to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen or when [UPDATE] was last used. Displays the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far and terminates editing.
You cannot move to another screen during edit operation of a ladder diagram by pressing
any function key such as the SYSTEM key unless you terminate editing.
- 54 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Create/add a new net]

(1) Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR. (See Subsection 8.2.1.)
Position the cursor on SUB72. Alternatively, position the cursor on the net immediately below the
position at which you want to add a new net. Press soft key [CREATE].
The PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen is displayed.

(2) Create a ladder program using the variety of instructions displayed as soft keys.
To set an address, press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel; this causes
alphabetic letters to be displayed as soft keys, enabling you to enter alphabetic letters using these
soft keys.
For the operator's panel with the full keyboard: Use the alphabetic keys on the operator's panel to
enter alphabetic letters.
- 55 -
8.EDITING
Instruction
B-85314EN-1/01
Menu on the NET EDITOR screen

Function
Reads the signal state of a specified address.
Reads the signal state of a specified address and inverts it.
Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address.
Inverts the state of a logic operation result and writes it to a specified address.
FUNC
Selects a functional instruction.

Connects one step to another.
Deletes a basic or functional instruction.
Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Left side of an instruction)
Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Right side of an instruction)
AUTO
Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter

numbers.
Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address to keep it.
Resets a kept output.
TABLE
RESTRE
NEXT NET
INSLIN
INSCLM
APPCLM
CANCEL EDIT
EXIT
Displayed if the cursor is positioned on the functional instruction COD (SUB7) or CODB
(SUB27). It is used to change the contents of the data table of these functional
instructions.
Returns the currently edited net to the state in which it was when editing started.
Terminates the editing of the current net and allows you to edit the next net.
When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [ZOOM] on the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates changing the current net and enables
the next net to be edited.
When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [CREATE NET] on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates creating the current net,
inserts the created net, and immediately enters the status in which a new net is created
(empty net status).
Inserts a blank line at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram located below the
cursor position will be shifted downward by one line. If a blank line is inserted in the
middle of a functional instruction, the functional instruction will be expanded vertically,
expanding the space between input conditions.
Inserts a blank column at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the right of the
cursor position moves right one column.
Inserts a blank column at the right of the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the
right of the cursor position moves right one column and the ladder diagram is extended
horizontally if necessary.
Returns the net currently being edited to the state at the start of the editing and displays
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Analyzes the net being edited and stores it in the ladder program. If any error is found in
the net, the NET EDITOR screen remains displayed and an error message is displayed.
- 56 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) To enter a functional instruction, first press soft key [FUNC].

Then, position the cursor on the functional instruction you want to enter and press soft key
[SELECT]. This causes the functional instruction to be inserted into the NET EDITOR screen,
allowing you to specify various parameters (timer No. and time in the case of SUB24 fixed timer).
(4) Ladder programs such as those shown below cannot be created.
The output coil has conditional branching.
- 57 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Modify the ladder program]

(1) Delete an entered instruction:
Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key
To delete an instruction entered in parallel, follow the procedure below.

Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key
Then, press soft key
- 58 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
To delete a functional instruction, follow the procedure below.

Position the cursor on the desired functional instruction No.
Press soft key
.
This causes the functional instruction to be deleted, separating nets. Use soft key
the nets.
To delete a net, follow the procedure below.

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
Position the cursor on the net you want to delete, and press soft key [DELETE].
- 59 -
to connect
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) Add an instruction:

Call the NET EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the location where you want to add an
instruction. Press soft key
or
to add an instruction, then set an address.
If required, before adding a functional instruction, use soft key
to delete the net from the
location at which the instruction is to be added, reserving the space for the functional instruction.
- 60 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
To add a functional instruction between instructions or between nets, follow the procedure
below.
Press the rightmost soft key. This changes the soft key menu.
To add an instruction between nets or between instructions entered in parallel:
Move the cursor below the position at which you want to add an instruction, then press
soft key [INSLIN].
To add an instruction between instructions entered in series:
Move the cursor to the right or left of the position at which an instruction is to be added.
To insert an instruction to the right of the cursor position, press soft key [APPCLM]; to
insert it to the left of the cursor position, press soft key [INSCLM].
Add an instruction to the created space.
- 61 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Copy or move a net.

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Position the
cursor on the net you want to copy. Press soft key [SELECT]. Use the cursor or other keys to
specify the copy area. After specifying the area, press soft key [COPY]. Move the cursor to the
position at which you want to copy the net, and press soft key [PASTE].
(4) Switch the display format:

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
Press the rightmost soft key, and the soft key menu will change. Press soft key [+]. This allows you
to change the various settings for ladder diagram display.
- 62 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Item
ADDRESS NOTATION
FUNCTION STYLE
SHOW COMMENT OF
CONTACT
SHOW COMMENT OF
COIL
SHOW CURSOR
SUBPROGRAM NET
NUMBER
WRAP SEARCH
ENABLED
PROGRAM LIST
ORDER
FRAME NET ON
SUBPROGRAM
DISPLAY
HEAVY LINES IN
LADDER DIAGRAM
ON/OFF CHANGE OF
RELAY SHAPE
ADDRESS COLOR
DIAGRAM COLOR
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR
PARAMETER COLOR
COMMENT COLOR
Description
Used to specify whether to display addresses in the ladder diagram as symbols or
addresses. Those addresses for which no symbols have been defined will always be
displayed as addresses.
Used to switch the functional instruction display format.
COMPACT: Reduces the functional instruction display area to a minimum. The
address parameter monitor is not displayed.
WIDE:
Reserves a wide area for displaying the current address parameter value
monitor.
TALL:
Reserves a tall area for displaying the current address parameter value
monitor.
Used to switch the format in which comments are to be displayed below contacts.
NONE: Displays no comments. This allows more contacts to be displayed on the
screen.
1 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 1-line format.
2 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 2-line format.
Used to specify whether to display comments at coil positions.
YES: Displays comments on the right of the ladder diagram.
NO: Displays no comments. This allows more relays to be displayed horizontally.
Comments can be displayed.
Used to specify whether to display the cursor.
YES: Displays the cursor. The cursor movement keys are sued to move the cursor.
For a search, the cursor will move to a found object such as a relay.
NO: Does not display the cursor. The up and down cursor movement keys are used
to directly move the screen display position.
Used to select a method of assigning numbers to the nets to be displayed.
LOCAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of the subprogram currently opened. The net
number display is the display range/number of nets in the entire subprogram
currently opened.
GLOBAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of all ladder programs (second PMC). The net
number display is the display range/subprogram range.
Used to specify whether to continue the search starting at the beginning of the ladder
program when the end of the ladder program is reached in a search process.
YES: If the end of the ladder program is reached in a forward search, continues the
search at the beginning. If the beginning is reached in a backward search,
continues the search at the end.
NO: At the point when the end or beginning of the ladder program is reached,
assumes the search to be a failure if no match is found, displaying an error
message.
Used to specify whether to display the subprograms on the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR
screen in the order of program numbers or symbols.
Used to specify whether to display functional instructions END1, END2, SP, and SPE
when the contents of a program are displayed using the [ZOOM] key on the
PROGRAM LIST MONITOR/EDITOR screen.
Used to specify the thickness of the lines in the ladder diagram.
YES: Uses heavy lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little larger.
NO: Uses light lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little smaller.
Used to specify whether to change the shape of each relay according to its status.
YES: Changes the shape of each relay according to its status. This setting is valid
only when "HEAVY LINES IN LADDER DIAGRAM" is set to "YES".
NO: Does not change the shape of each relay.
Used to set the color of symbols and addresses.
Used to set the color of the ladder diagram.
Used to set the color of a relay when it is ON.
Used to set the color of functional instruction parameters in the monitor display section.
Used to set the color of comments.
- 63 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Pressing soft key [INIT] causes all settings to be changed to their defaults. After changing settings,
press soft key [EXIT] to return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR or NET EDITOR screen.
(5) Search for an instruction:
Press soft key [SEARCH]. This changes the soft key menu.
Item
TOPBTM
SEARCH
W-SRCH
F-SRCH
PREV
NEXT
GLOBAL
Description
Causes a jump to the beginning of the ladder program. If the beginning is already displayed,
causes a jump to the end.
Searches for the address or net number corresponding to an entered character string, displaying
it if it is found. If a number is entered, the system interprets it as a net number.
If a character string other than a number is entered, the system examines to see if the character
string has been defined as a symbol. If it has been defined as a symbol, the system searches for
the address represented by that symbol. If it has not been defined as a symbol, the system
interprets it as a character string representing an address. If succeeding in interpreting it
correctly, the system searches for the address.
Searches for the write coil in which the entered character string is used.
Accepts a functional instruction No. or functional instruction name as input and searches for the
functional instruction.
Repeats the last successful search operation in the backward direction.
Repeats the last successful search operation in the forward direction.
Switches the search target between all ladder programs (second PMC) and the subprogram
currently opened. The current search target is displayed at the rightmost position.
The system ladder programs (LV1, LV2, P1-P1499) are protected, so that the system ladder
programs cannot be search targets even if "GLOBAL" is selected.
Pressing soft key [EXIT] causes the search menu to be exited.
- 64 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
8.3
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES

CAUTION
English messages are set in this section because the multi-language display
function is used for ladder messages.
Press the emergency stop button.

Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].
Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)
Press soft key [MESAGE].
Press soft key [(OPRT)].
Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state).
The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].
(The ladder program stops.)
- 65 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
The MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.
Use soft key [SEARCH], <page> keys and the <cursor> keys appropriately to search for the address to
which a message is to be entered.
- 66 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Position the cursor on the target address and press soft key [ZOOM].
Position the cursor on the number setting field and enter the alarm or message number. Move the cursor
to the message setting field, enter the message, and press soft key [EXIT ZOOM].
After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].
The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.
Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)
- 67 -
8.EDITING
8.4
B-85314EN-1/01
EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS

Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].
Press soft key [SYMBOL].
Press oft key [(OPRT)].
Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)
The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].
(The ladder program stops.)
- 68 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
The SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.
If you want to change a symbol or comment at an address, use soft key [SEARCH].
If you want to add a new symbol or comment, use soft key [NEW ENTRY].
Move the cursor to move the yellow cursor from the symbol field to the program field. Set required data
in each field.
After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].
The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.
Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)
- 69 -
8.EDITING
8.5
B-85314EN-1/01
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION
Edited ladder programs and other data are lost if you just turn the power off. After editing, write the data
to the flash ROM. Use the following procedure:
Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press soft key [I/O].
The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.

Select the following items and press soft key [(OPRT)]:
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
= PMC2
= FLASH ROM
= WRITE
= SEQUENCE PROGRAM
Press soft key [EXEC]. Writing edited data to the flash ROM starts.
"COMPLETE" is displayed to indicate completion.
- 70 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
CONFIRMATION
9.1
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS
You can display the ladder program status screen. Use the following procedure:
Press soft key [PMC LADDER].
Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if
necessary.)
Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 71 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [ZOOM].
If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key
[LADDER] or press [(OPRT)] then [ZOOM]. The ladder diagram screen is displayed.
Soft key
LIST
SEARCH MENU
SWITCH
SWITCH PMC
SCREEN
SETING
Function
Lists ladder programs.
Displays the search menu in the soft key area.
Switches to the select monitor screen.
Switches to the first PMC, second PMC, and dual check.
Calls the setup screen of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
The settings are the same as those on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
- 72 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
9.2
SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS
You can display the logic status of each signal. Use the following procedure:
Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press soft key [SIGNAL STATUS].

The SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed.
"1" is displayed when the corresponding signal is ON. "0" is displayed when it is OFF.
Enter the address or symbol you want to reference and press soft keys [(OPRT)] [SEARCH], and
information for that address is displayed.
CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area.
If the second PMC is not selected, the signal status screen, when displayed,
does not display symbols set with the custom PMC. So, check that "2ND PMC"
is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 73 -
10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS
10
B-85314EN-1/01
SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. However, the
PMC parameters are common to the first PMC and second PMC. So, do not use
addresses other than the usable ones.
To set the parameters for timers, counters, keep relays, and data tables, use the following procedure:
(Switch the operation mode to MDI mode.)

Press
Press
or
(The CNC SETTING screen is displayed.)
Press soft key [SETTING].
Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to 1:ENABLE.
Press
or
(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)
- 74 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again until the following soft keys are displayed.
For timers: Press soft key [TIMER].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the setting time.
- 75 -
B-85314EN-1/01
For counters: Press soft key [COUNTR].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the value.
For keep relays: Press soft key [KEEP RELAY].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the values.
- 76 -
B-85314EN-1/01
For data tables: Press soft key [DATA].
The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed.

To change the data type, position the cursor on the TYPE field and change the setting.
Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [ZOOM].
Use the cursor and page keys and soft key [SEARCH] to move the cursor, and enter the value.
- 77 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
11
INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
11.1
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN
Connect either a memory card or Handy File (RS-232C).
Press
or
(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again and press soft key [I/O].
The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.
- 78 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Input operation (from an external device to the ROBODRILL)

(1) Place the machine in the MDI mode and press the emergency stop button to place the machine in the
emergency stop state.
(2) On the I/O DATA screen, move the item and data selection cursors and make the following settings:
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME
Data
PMC2
MEMORY CARD / FLOPPY
READ
(Cannot be specified.)
The type of read data is automatically determined
Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the file name
with up to three characters for the extension).
Pressing [(OPRT)] [LIST] displays a list of files on the memory card. Position
the cursor on the file you want to read and press the [SELECT] key to select the
file.
(3) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Reading the file starts.
When an attempt is made to read a file, the following message is displayed, asking whether to read
the file:
READING MESSAGE DATA (SEQUENCE PROGRAM) (PMC2)
<CAUTION>Special care must be exercised to read a sequence program or PMC parameters.
*
Reading an inappropriate file may cause unexpected operation of the machine.
*
When a sequence program is read during operation, the program automatically stops.
Do you want to read this file?
To continue with the operation, press the [EXEC] key.

(The ladder program being executed automatically stops.)
(4) After the completion of reading in step <3>, write each type of data to the flash ROM. Make the
following settings:
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME
Data
PMC2
FLASH ROM
WRITE
SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)
MESSAGES (for message data)
(Not set)
(5) Press the [(OPRT)] key [EXEC] key to execute data writing. "COMPLETE" is displayed to
indicate completion.
WARNING
When data is read during the execution of a ladder program, the ladder program
automatically stops. Special care must be exercised to stop a ladder program.
If a ladder program is stopped at an inappropriate timing or in an inappropriate
machine state, the machine may perform unexpected operation. In the ladder
program stopped state, the safety mechanism and monitoring functions of the
ladder program also stop. Be sure to confirm that "the machine is in an
appropriate state" and that "no one is near the machine" before stopping the
ladder program.
- 79 -
B-85314EN-1/01
On the PMC I/O DATA screen, pressing soft keys [(OPRT)] [PORT SETTING] displays the
communication setting screen.
Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)

(1) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME
Data
PMC2
MEMORY CARD/FLOPPY
WRITE
SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)
MESSAGES (for message data)
Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the
file name with up to three characters for the extension).
Pressing [(OPRT)] [NEW FILE] specifies:
PMC2_LAD.000 (for ladder data)
PMC2_MSG.000 (for message data)
(2) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Outputting a message file starts, with the specified
file name.
CAUTION
No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, no
message file can be output.
- 80 -
B-85314EN-1/01
11.2
OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN
(1) Turn the power OFF.

(2) Insert a memory card into the memory card insertion slot located on the left side of the LCD. (Make
sure that the label on the memory card is facing to the right, and push it in until it snaps into place.)
(3) Press and hold down the soft keys shown in the figure below, and turn on the power ON.
(Keep holding down the keys until the screen shown under (4) is displayed.)
[Turn power ON while holding them down]

(4) The boot screen is displayed.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
60W4 - 05
1.END
2.USER DATA LOADING
3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING
4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
7.SRAM DATA UTILITY
8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
*** MESSAGE ***

SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(5) Input operation (from a memory card to the ROBODRILL)

(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "2.USER DATA
LOADING" and press the [SELECT] key.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)
1 PMC2.MEM
131200 2011-09-26 08:56
2 PMC2_MSG.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:58
3 END
*** MESSAGE ***

(b) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press
[SELECT]:
Example:
"PMC2.MEM" (for ladder data)
"PMC2_MSG.MEM" (for message data)
(c) When a file is selected, the message "LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO" is displayed,
asking whether to read the file. Press [YES].
- 81 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(d) When reading terminates normally, the message "LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT
KEY." is displayed. Press the [SELECT] key.
(e) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select "END" and press the [SELECT] key. You exit the
SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
(6) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to a memory card)
(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "6.SYSTEM DATA
SAVE" and press the [SELECT] key.
(b) On the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen, press the rightmost soft key [>] and display the page
containing either of the following items:
"PMC2" (for ladder data)
"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
FROM DIRECTORY
1 NC BAS-1(0008)
2 NC BAS-2(0008)
3 NC BAS-3(0008)
4 NC BAS-4(0008)
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B
(0006)
7 PMC1
(0003)
8 END
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES
][
NO
][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(c) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press
[SELECT]:
"PMC2" (for ladder data)
"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)
(d) The confirmation message "SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed.
Press [YES]. Outputting the message file starts.
(e) When the output to the memory card terminates normally, the following message is displayed.
Press the [SELECT] key.
"FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY."
"SAVE FILE NAME : PMC2.000" (for ladder data)
"SAVE FILE NAME : M2PMCMSG.000" (for messages)
When the memory card contains a file with the same name, the number of the extension is
incremented by one. (***.001 - ***.002)
(f) Position the cursor on "END" and press the [SELECT] key to exit the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
screen.
- 82 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(7) Existing the boot screen

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on "1.END" and press the [SELECT] key.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
60W4 - 05
1.END
2.USER DATA LOADING
3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING
4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
7.SRAM DATA UTILITY
8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
*** MESSAGE ***

The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed. Press the [YES]
key. This causes you to exit the boot screen, displaying the CNC or QUICK screen.
CAUTION
No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore,
M2PMCMSG cannot be output.
- 83 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM

AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12
Address
B-85314EN-1/01
INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM

[System ladder Custom ladder]
Function
Symbol
Note
R 1300.0
R 1300.1
R 1300.2
SI0_0
SI0_1
SI0_2
R 1300.3
R 1300.4
R 1300.5
R 1300.6
R 1300.7
SI0_3
SI0_4
SI0_5
SI0_6
SI0_7
Always ON.
Always OFF.
ON in a single scanning cycle at the start of
operation.
1.0-second clock pulse
(Not used)
(Not used)
R 1301.0
R 1301.1
R 1301.2
R 1301.3
R 1301.4
R 1301.5
R 1301.6
R 1301.7
SI1_0
SI1_1
SI1_2
SI1_3
SI1_4
SI1_5
SI1_6
SI1_7
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
R 1302.0
R 1302.1
R 1302.2
R 1302.3
R 1302.4
R 1302.5
R 1302.6
R 1302.7
SI2_0
SI2_1
SI2_2
SI2_3
SI2_4
SI2_5
SI2_6
SI2_7
Selected program No. 20

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
R 1303.0
R 1303.1
R 1303.2
R 1303.3
R 1303.4
R 1303.5
R 1303.6
R 1303.7
SI3_0
SI3_1
SI3_2
SI3_3
SI3_4
SI3_5
SI3_6
SI3_7

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
R 1304.0
R 1304.1
R 1304.2
R 1304.3
R 1304.4
R 1304.5
R 1304.6
R 1304.7
SI4_0
SI4_1
SI4_2
SI4_3
SI4_4
SI4_5
SI4_6
SI4_7
Tool No. 20
Tool No. 21
Tool No. 22
Tool No. 23
Tool No. 24
Tool No. 25
Tool No. 26
Tool No. 27
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
- 84 -
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1305.0
R 1305.1
R 1305.2
R 1305.3
R 1305.4
R 1305.5
R 1305.6
R 1305.7
SI5_0
SI5_1
SI5_2
SI5_3
SI5_4
SI5_5
SI5_6
SI5_7
/M code BCD 20*1

M80 output/M code BCD 21*1
12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
R 1306.0
R 1306.1
R 1306.2
R 1306.3
R 1306.4
R 1306.5
R 1306.6
R 1306.7
SI6_0
SI6_1
SI6_2
SI6_3
SI6_4
SI6_5
SI6_6
SI6_7
M87 output/data read request

M88 output/distribution completion
M89 output/BCD data parity check
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
R 1307.0
R 1307.1
R 1307.2
R 1307.3
R 1307.4
R 1307.5
R 1307.6
R 1307.7
SI7_0
SI7_1
SI7_2
SI7_3
SI7_4
SI7_5
SI7_6
SI7_7
Machine status output 1 (END1 output)

Cycle start (in progress)
Condition of feed hold
Condition of alarm
Condition of reset
Condition of emergency stop
12.16
12.16
12.16
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
R 1308.0
R 1308.1
R 1308.2
R 1308.3
R 1308.4
R 1308.5
R 1308.6
R 1308.7
SI8_0
SI8_1
SI8_2
SI8_3
SI8_4
SI8_5
SI8_6
SI8_7
MEM mode selection

MDI mode selection
Handle mode selection
Jog mode selection
Reference mode selection
Edit mode selection
Program stoppage
Production completion
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.2
12.15
R 1309.0
R 1309.1
R 1309.2
R 1309.3
R 1309.4
R 1309.5
R 1309.6
R 1309.7
SI9_0
SI9_1
SI9_2
SI9_3
SI9_4
SI9_5
SI9_6
SI9_7
End of selection
(Reserved)
Battery alarm
End of program
Machine interior coolant output ON
Splash guard door closed state
Automatic side door closed state
Automatic side door open state
12.5
/M code BCD 20*100

/M code BCD 21*100
/M code BCD 22*100
/M code BCD 23*100
- 85 -
12.6
12.6
12.6
12.6
12.2
12.18
12.17
12.19
12.20
12.20

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1310.0
R 1310.1
R 1310.2
R 1310.3
R 1310.4
R 1310.5
R 1310.6
R 1310.7
SI10_0
SI10_1
SI10_2
SI10_3
SI10_4
SI10_5
SI10_6
SI10_7
Door open (M60)

Automatic door closed state
Automatic door open state
Warning level detection
Breakage level detection
Spindle stop
Auto mode
Tool life end (tool group)
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.21
12.21
12.22
12.2
12.11
R 1311.0
R 1311.1
R 1311.2
R 1311.3
R 1311.4
R 1311.5
R 1311.6
R 1311.7
SI11_0
SI11_1
SI11_2
SI11_3
SI11_4
SI11_5
SI11_6
SI11_7
Coolant output ON
Automatic door open request output
Automatic door close request output
Air blow output
Production completion 1
Production completion 2
Advance notice of tool life
Center through coolant output ON
12.17
12.3
12.3
12.17
12.15
12.15
12.11
12.17
R 1312.0
R 1312.1
R 1312.2
R 1312.3
R 1312.4
R 1312.5
R 1312.6
R 1312.7
SI12_0
SI12_1
SI12_2
SI12_3
SI12_4
SI12_5
SI12_6
SI12_7
Display in Japanese
Display in German
Display in French
(Reserved)
Display in Italian
Display in Korean
Display in Spanish
Display in English
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
R 1313.0
R 1313.1
R 1313.2
R 1313.3
R 1313.4
R 1313.5
R 1313.6
R 1313.7
SI13_0
SI13_1
SI13_2
SI13_3
SI13_4
SI13_5
SI13_6
SI13_7
Position switch 1
Position switch 2
Position switch 3
Position switch 4
Position switch 5
Position switch 6
Position switch 7
Position switch 8
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
R 1314.0
R 1314.1
R 1314.2
R 1314.3
R 1314.4
R 1314.5
R 1314.6
R 1314.7
SI14_0
SI14_1
SI14_2
SI14_3
SI14_4
SI14_5
SI14_6
SI14_7
Movement along the X-axis

Movement along the Y-axis
Movement along the Z-axis
Movement along the 4-th axis
Movement along the 5-th axis
Low air pressure
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.2
Emergency stop button
12.2
- 86 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address

Function
Symbol
Note
R 1315.0
R 1315.1
R 1315.2
R 1315.3
R 1315.4
R 1315.5
R 1315.6
R 1315.7
SI15_0
SI15_1
SI15_2
SI15_3
SI15_4
SI15_5
SI15_6
SI15_7
Completion of X-axis reference position return

Completion of Y-axis reference position return
Completion of Z-axis reference position return
Completion of 4th-axis reference position return
Completion of machining
Feedrate override 100%
Spindle speed override 100%
R 1316.0
R 1316.1
R 1316.2
R 1316.3
R 1316.4
R 1316.5
R 1316.6
R 1316.7
SI16_0
SI16_1
SI16_2
SI16_3
SI16_4
SI16_5
SI16_6
SI16_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R 1317.0
R 1317.1
R 1317.2
R 1317.3
R 1317.4
R 1317.5
R 1317.6
R 1317.7
SI17_0
SI17_1
SI17_2
SI17_3
SI17_4
SI17_5
SI17_6
SI17_7
Door open (M61)

Door open (M62)
Door open (M63)
Door open (M64)
Door open (M65)
Alarm output 2
Operation-enabled state
(Not used)
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.10
12.2
R 1318.0
R 1318.1
R 1318.2
R 1318.3
R 1318.4
R 1318.5
R 1318.6
R 1318.7
SI18_0
SI18_1
SI18_2
SI18_3
SI18_4
SI18_5
SI18_6
SI18_7
Establishment of X-axis reference position

Establishment of Y-axis reference position
Establishment of Z-axis reference position
Establishment of 4th-axis reference position
Establishment of 5th-axis reference position
Tool group reset request reception
Tool group reset error
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.11
12.11
R 1319.0
SI19_0
Completion of X-axis reference position return
R 1319.1
SI19_1
Completion of Y-axis reference position return
R 1319.2
SI19_2
Completion of Z-axis reference position return
R 1319.3
SI19_3
R 1319.4
SI19_4
(When ZPX is ON at the

completion of G27 or G28)
(When ZPY is ON at the
(When ZPZ is ON at the
(When ZP4 is ON at the completion
of G27 or G28)
(When ZP5 is ON at the completion
of G27 or G28)
R 1319.5
R 1319.6
R 1319.7
SI19_5
SI19_6
SI19_7
- 87 -
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.18
12.2
12.2

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1320.0
R 1320.1
R 1320.2
R 1320.3
R 1320.4
R 1320.5
R 1320.6
R 1320.7
SI20_0
SI20_1
SI20_2
SI20_3
SI20_4
SI20_5
SI20_6
SI20_7
S command 2^0
S command 2^1
S command 2^2
S command 2^3
S command 2^4
S command 2^5
S command 2^6
S command 2^7
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
R 1321.0
R 1321.1
R 1321.2
R 1321.3
R 1321.4
R 1321.5
R 1321.6
R 1321.7
SI21_0
SI21_1
SI21_2
SI21_3
SI21_4
SI21_5
SI21_6
SI21_7
S command 2^8
S command 2^9
S command 2^10
S command 2^11
S command 2^12
S command 2^13
S command 2^14
S command 2^15
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
R 1322.0
R 1322.1
R 1322.2
R 1322.3
R 1322.4
R 1322.5
R 1322.6
R 1322.7
SI22_0
SI22_1
SI22_2
SI22_3
SI22_4
SI22_5
SI22_6
SI22_7
S command 2^16
S command 2^17
S command 2^18
S command 2^19
S command 2^20
S command 2^21
S command 2^22
S command 2^23
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
R 1323.0
R 1323.1
R 1323.2
R 1323.3
R 1323.4
R 1323.5
R 1323.6
R 1323.7
SI23_0
SI23_1
SI23_2
SI23_3
SI23_4
SI23_5
SI23_6
SI23_7
S command 2^24
S command 2^25
S command 2^26
S command 2^27
S command 2^28
S command 2^29
S command 2^30
S command 2^31
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
R 1324.0
R 1324.1
R 1324.2
R 1324.3
R 1324.4
R 1324.5
R 1324.6
SI24_0
SI24_1
SI24_2
SI24_3
SI24_4
SI24_5
SI24_6
M03 command
M05 command
Spindle rotation button ON
Center through coolant pump on
Center through coolant on
Air purge on
Automatic fire extinguishing device error
R 1324.7
SI24_7
Start of the automatic fire extinguishing device
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.17
12.17
12.17
ON when the automatic fire
extinguishing device is faulty or the
power is off. (Option)
ON when the automatic fire
extinguishing device starts.
(Option)
- 88 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1325.0
R 1325.1
R 1325.2
R 1325.3
R 1325.4
R 1325.5
R 1325.6
R 1325.7
SI25_0
SI25_1
SI25_2
SI25_3
SI25_4
SI25_5
SI25_6
SI25_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1100)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1326.0
R 1326.1
R 1326.2
R 1326.3
R 1326.4
R 1326.5
R 1326.6
R 1326.7
SI26_0
SI26_1
SI26_2
SI26_3
SI26_4
SI26_5
SI26_6
SI26_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1327.0
R 1327.1
R 1327.2
R 1327.3
R 1327.4
R 1327.5
R 1327.6
R 1327.7
SI27_0
SI27_1
SI27_2
SI27_3
SI27_4
SI27_5
SI27_6
SI27_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1328.0
R 1328.1
R 1328.2
R 1328.3
R 1328.4
R 1328.5
R 1328.6
R 1328.7
SI28_0
SI28_1
SI28_2
SI28_3
SI28_4
SI28_5
SI28_6
SI28_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1329.0
R 1329.1
R 1329.2
R 1329.3
R 1329.4
R 1329.5
R 1329.6
R 1329.7
SI29_0
SI29_1
SI29_2
SI29_3
SI29_4
SI29_5
SI29_6
SI29_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
- 89 -

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1330.0
R 1330.1
R 1330.2
R 1330.3
R 1330.4
R 1330.5
R 1330.6
R 1330.7
SI30_0
SI30_1
SI30_2
SI30_3
SI30_4
SI30_5
SI30_6
SI30_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1331.0
R 1331.1
R 1331.2
R 1331.3
R 1331.4
R 1331.5
R 1331.6
R 1331.7
SI31_0
SI31_1
SI31_2
SI31_3
SI31_4
SI31_5
SI31_6
SI31_7
Clamp request (5th axis)

Unclamp request (5th axis)
Clamped (5th axis)
Clamp request (4th axis)
Unclamp request (4th axis)
Clamped (4th axis)
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
R 1332.0
R 1332.1
R 1332.2
R 1332.3
R 1332.4
R 1332.5
R 1332.6
R 1332.7
SI32_0
SI32_1
SI32_2
SI32_3
SI32_4
SI32_5
SI32_6
SI32_7
Selected tool group No. 2^0

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1333.0
R 1333.1
R 1333.2
R 1333.3
R 1333.4
R 1333.5
R 1333.6
R 1333.7
SI33_0
SI33_1
SI33_2
SI33_3
SI33_4
SI33_5
SI33_6
SI33_7
Tool life of group 1

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1334.0
R 1334.1
R 1334.2
R 1334.3
R 1334.4
R 1334.5
R 1334.6
R 1334.7
SI34_0
SI34_1
SI34_2
SI34_3
SI34_4
SI34_5
SI34_6
SI34_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 90 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1335.0
R 1335.1
R 1335.2
R 1335.3
R 1335.4
R 1335.5
R 1335.6
R 1335.7
SI35_0
SI35_1
SI35_2
SI35_3
SI35_4
SI35_5
SI35_6
SI35_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 1

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1336.0
R 1336.1
R 1336.2
R 1336.3
R 1336.4
R 1336.5
R 1336.6
R 1336.7
SI36_0
SI36_1
SI36_2
SI36_3
SI36_4
SI36_5
SI36_6
SI36_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1337.0
R 1337.1
R 1337.2
R 1337.3
R 1337.4
R 1337.5
R 1337.6
R 1337.7
SI37_0
SI37_1
SI37_2
SI37_3
SI37_4
SI37_5
SI37_6
SI37_7
Display in Chinese (Simplified)

Display in Portuguese
Display in Russian
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
12.23
12.23
12.23
R 1338.0
R 1338.1
R 1338.2
R 1338.3
R 1338.4
R 1338.5
R 1338.6
R 1338.7
SI38_0
SI38_1
SI38_2
SI38_3
SI38_4
SI38_5
SI38_6
SI38_7
Tool clamp signal

Tool change signal
Turret recovery mode
Single block
Rapid traverse LOW
Rapid traverse 25%
Rapid traverse 50%
Rapid traverse 100%
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
R 1339.0
R 1339.1
SI39_0
SI39_1
Tap return mode

Condition of reset
12.2
ON while the reset button on the
operator's panel is being pressed.
R 1339.2
R 1339.3
R 1339.4
R 1339.5
R 1339.6
R 1339.7
SI39_2
SI39_3
SI39_4
SI39_5
SI39_6
SI39_7
- 91 -

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1400.0
R 1400.1
R 1400.2
R 1400.3
R 1400.4
R 1400.5
R 1400.6
R 1400.7
SI50_0
SI50_1
SI50_2
SI50_3
SI50_4
SI50_5
SI50_6
SI50_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1401.0
R 1401.1
R 1401.2
R 1401.3
R 1401.4
R 1401.5
R 1401.6
R 1401.7
SI51_0
SI51_1
SI51_2
SI51_3
SI51_4
SI51_5
SI51_6
SI51_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1402.0
R 1402.1
R 1402.2
R 1402.3
R 1402.4
R 1402.5
R 1402.6
R 1402.7
SI52_0
SI52_1
SI52_2
SI52_3
SI52_4
SI52_5
SI52_6
SI52_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1403.0
R 1403.1
R 1403.2
R 1403.3
R 1403.4
R 1403.5
R 1403.6
R 1403.7
SI53_0
SI53_1
SI53_2
SI53_3
SI53_4
SI53_5
SI53_6
SI53_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1404.0
R 1404.1
R 1404.2
R 1404.3
R 1404.4
R 1404.5
R 1404.6
R 1404.7
SI54_0
SI54_1
SI54_2
SI54_3
SI54_4
SI54_5
SI54_6
SI54_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 92 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1405.0
R 1405.1
R 1405.2
R 1405.3
R 1405.4
R 1405.5
R 1405.6
R 1405.7
SI55_0
SI55_1
SI55_2
SI55_3
SI55_4
SI55_5
SI55_6
SI55_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1406.0
R 1406.1
R 1406.2
R 1406.3
R 1406.4
R 1406.5
R 1406.6
R 1406.7
SI56_0
SI56_1
SI56_2
SI56_3
SI56_4
SI56_5
SI56_6
SI56_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1407.0
R 1407.1
R 1407.2
R 1407.3
R 1407.4
R 1407.5
R 1407.6
R 1407.7
SI57_0
SI57_1
SI57_2
SI57_3
SI57_4
SI57_5
SI57_6
SI57_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1408.0
R 1408.1
R 1408.2
R 1408.3
R 1408.4
R 1408.5
R 1408.6
R 1408.7
SI58_0
SI58_1
SI58_2
SI58_3
SI58_4
SI58_5
SI58_6
SI58_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1409.0
R 1409.1
R 1409.2
R 1409.3
R 1409.4
R 1409.5
R 1409.6
R 1409.7
SI59_0
SI59_1
SI59_2
SI59_3
SI59_4
SI59_5
SI59_6
SI59_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 93 -

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1410.0
R 1410.1
R 1410.2
R 1410.3
R 1410.4
R 1410.5
R 1410.6
R 1410.7
SI60_0
SI60_1
SI60_2
SI60_3
SI60_4
SI60_5
SI60_6
SI60_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1411.0
R 1411.1
R 1411.2
R 1411.3
R 1411.4
R 1411.5
R 1411.6
R 1411.7
SI61_0
SI61_1
SI61_2
SI61_3
SI61_4
SI61_5
SI61_6
SI61_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1412.0
R 1412.1
R 1412.2
R 1412.3
R 1412.4
R 1412.5
R 1412.6
R 1412.7
SI62_0
SI62_1
SI62_2
SI62_3
SI62_4
SI62_5
SI62_6
SI62_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1413.0
R 1413.1
R 1413.2
R 1413.3
R 1413.4
R 1413.5
R 1413.6
R 1413.7
SI63_0
SI63_1
SI63_2
SI63_3
SI63_4
SI63_5
SI63_6
SI63_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1414.0
R 1414.1
R 1414.2
R 1414.3
R 1414.4
R 1414.5
R 1414.6
R 1414.7
SI64_0
SI64_1
SI64_2
SI64_3
SI64_4
SI64_5
SI64_6
SI64_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 94 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1415.0
R 1415.1
R 1415.2
R 1415.3
R 1415.4
R 1415.5
R 1415.6
R 1415.7
SI65_0
SI65_1
SI65_2
SI65_3
SI65_4
SI65_5
SI65_6
SI65_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1416.0
R 1416.1
R 1416.2
R 1416.3
R 1416.4
R 1416.5
R 1416.6
R 1416.7
SI66_0
SI66_1
SI66_2
SI66_3
SI66_4
SI66_5
SI66_6
SI66_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1417.0
R 1417.1
R 1417.2
R 1417.3
R 1417.4
R 1417.5
R 1417.6
R 1417.7
SI67_0
SI67_1
SI67_2
SI67_3
SI67_4
SI67_5
SI67_6
SI67_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1418.0
R 1418.1
R 1418.2
R 1418.3
R 1418.4
R 1418.5
R 1418.6
R 1418.7
SI68_0
SI68_1
SI68_2
SI68_3
SI68_4
SI68_5
SI68_6
SI68_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1419.0
R 1419.1
R 1419.2
R 1419.3
R 1419.4
R 1419.5
R 1419.6
R 1419.7
SI69_0
SI69_1
SI69_2
SI69_3
SI69_4
SI69_5
SI69_6
SI69_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 95 -

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Note
R 1420.0
R 1420.1
R 1420.2
R 1420.3
R 1420.4
R 1420.5
R 1420.6
R 1420.7
SI70_0
SI70_1
SI70_2
SI70_3
SI70_4
SI70_5
SI70_6
SI70_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1421.0
R 1421.1
R 1421.2
R 1421.3
R 1421.4
R 1421.5
R 1421.6
R 1421.7
SI71_0
SI71_1
SI71_2
SI71_3
SI71_4
SI71_5
SI71_6
SI71_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1422.0
R 1422.1
R 1422.2
R 1422.3
R 1422.4
R 1422.5
R 1422.6
R 1422.7
SI72_0
SI72_1
SI72_2
SI72_3
SI72_4
SI72_5
SI72_6
SI72_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1423.0
R 1423.1
R 1423.2
R 1423.3
R 1423.4
R 1423.5
R 1423.6
R 1423.7
SI73_0
SI73_1
SI73_2
SI73_3
SI73_4
SI73_5
SI73_6
SI73_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1424.0
R 1424.1
R 1424.2
R 1424.3
R 1424.4
R 1424.5
R 1424.6
R 1424.7
SI74_0
SI74_1
SI74_2
SI74_3
SI74_4
SI74_5
SI74_6
SI74_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
- 96 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1425.0
R 1425.1
R 1425.2
R 1425.3
R 1425.4
R 1425.5
R 1425.6
R 1425.7
SI75_0
SI75_1
SI75_2
SI75_3
SI75_4
SI75_5
SI75_6
SI75_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1426.0
R 1426.1
R 1426.2
R 1426.3
R 1426.4
R 1426.5
R 1426.6
R 1426.7
SI76_0
SI76_1
SI76_2
SI76_3
SI76_4
SI76_5
SI76_6
SI76_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1427.0
R 1427.1
R 1427.2
R 1427.3
R 1427.4
R 1427.5
R 1427.6
R 1427.7
SI77_0
SI77_1
SI77_2
SI77_3
SI77_4
SI77_5
SI77_6
SI77_7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
R 1428.0
R 1428.1
R 1428.2
R 1428.3
R 1428.4
R 1428.5
R 1428.6
R 1428.7
SI78_0
SI78_1
SI78_2
SI78_3
SI78_4
SI78_5
SI78_6
SI78_7
Robot system being started

Cycle stop mode
System stop mode
System start
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
R 1429.0
R 1429.1
SI79_0
SI79_1
(Reserved)
Taper cleaning coolant ON signal
R 1429.2
SI79_2
Machining coolant ON signal
R 1429.3
R 1429.4
R 1429.5
R 1429.6
R 1429.7
SI79_3
SI79_4
SI79_5
SI79_6
SI79_7
Teach mode signal

Front door open signal
Interaction mode signal
- 97 -
When the taper cleaning coolant

valve and pump are ON
When the machining coolant valve
and pump are ON
12.33
12.33
12.33

Address

Function
Symbol
R 1430.0
R 1430.1
R 1430.2
R 1430.3
SI80_0
SI80_1
SI80_2
SI80_3
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Probe signal error
R 1430.4
R 1430.5
R 1430.6
R 1430.7
SI80_4
SI80_5
SI80_6
SI80_7
(Reserved)
R 1431.0
SI81_0
R 1431.1
SI81_1
R 1431.2
SI81_2
R 1431.3
SI81_3
R 1431.4
R 1431.5
SI81_4
SI81_5
R 1431.6
R 1431.7
SI81_6
SI81_7
When menu operation "1. TOOL CHANGE" is

selected
When menu operation "2. AXES MOVEMENT" is
selected
When menu operation "3. SPINDLE REV." is
selected
When menu operation "4. REF. POINT" is
selected
When menu operation "5. CANCEL" is selected
When menu operation "6. EXT. SIGNAL" is
selected
When menu operation "7. CLAMP" is selected
When menu operation "8. NC LANGUAGE" is
selected
R 1432.0
SI82_0
R 1432.1
SI82_1
R 1432.2
SI82_2
R 1432.3
SI82_3
R 1432.4
SI82_4
R 1432.5
SI82_5
R 1432.6
SI82_6
R 1432.7
SI82_7
B-85314EN-1/01
Note
ON when a touch probe failure is

detected between M38 and M39.
Error signal at tool registration/runout

measurement
Excessive tool runout signal
- 98 -
ON when a failure is detected (tool

runout detection function).
ON when there is excessive tool
runout (tool runout detection
function).

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
[CNC Custom ladder]

Function
Symbol
Note
F 0010.0
F 0010.1
F 0010.2
F 0010.3
F 0010.4
F 0010.5
F 0010.6
F 0010.7
M code 2^0
M code 2^1
M code 2^2
M code 2^3
M code 2^4
M code 2^5
M code 2^6
M code 2^7
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
F 0011.0
F 0011.1
F 0011.2
F 0011.3
F 0011.4
F 0011.5
F 0011.6
F 0011.7
M code 2^8
M code 2^9
M code 2^10
M code 2^11
M code 2^12
M code 2^13
M code 2^14
M code 2^15
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
F 0012.0
F 0012.1
F 0012.2
F 0012.3
F 0012.4
F 0012.5
F 0012.6
F 0012.7
M code 2^16
M code 2^17
M code 2^18
M code 2^19
M code 2^20
M code 2^21
M code 2^22
M code 2^23
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
F 0013.0
F 0013.1
F 0013.2
F 0013.3
F 0013.4
F 0013.5
F 0013.6
F 0013.7
M code 2^24
M code 2^25
M code 2^26
M code 2^27
M code 2^28
M code 2^29
M code 2^30
M code 2^31
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
- 99 -

Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[Custom ladder System ladder]

Function
Workpiece No./program No. search 2^0*1
/Program No. search 2^0*10
Note
R 1350.0
R 1350.1
R 1350.2
R 1350.3
R 1350.4
R 1350.5
R 1350.6
R 1350.7
SO0_0
SO0_1
SO0_2
SO0_3
SO0_4
SO0_5
SO0_6
SO0_7
R 1351.0
R 1351.1
R 1351.2
R 1351.3
R 1351.4
R 1351.5
R 1351.6
R 1351.7
SO1_0
SO1_1
SO1_2
SO1_3
SO1_4
SO1_5
SO1_6
SO1_7
R 1352.0
R 1352.1
R 1352.2
R 1352.3
R 1352.4
R 1352.5
R 1352.6
R 1352.7
SO2_0
SO2_1
SO2_2
SO2_3
SO2_4
SO2_5
SO2_6
SO2_7
Data read request

External start
External hold
External reset
External emergency stop
Completion (FIN)
Single block mode ON
Dry run mode ON
12.5
12.28
12.28
12.28
12.28
12.6
12.28
12.28
R 1353.0
R 1353.1
R 1353.2
R 1353.3
R 1353.4
R 1353.5
R 1353.6
R 1353.7
SO3_0
SO3_1
SO3_2
SO3_3
SO3_4
SO3_5
SO3_6
SO3_7
Door close request

External door open control
External door close control
DNC operation
Custom macro interrupt
Reset & rewind
Automatic side door open request
Automatic side door close request
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.28
12.8
12.9
12.20
12.20
R 1354.0
SO4_0
12.13
R 1354.1
R 1354.2
R 1354.3
R 1354.4
R 1354.5
R 1354.6
R 1354.7
SO4_1
SO4_2
SO4_3
SO4_4
SO4_5
SO4_6
SO4_7
Disabling of machine operator's panel start

button
X-axis interlock
Y-axis interlock
Z-axis interlock
4-th axis interlock
5-th axis interlock
Door interlock
(Reserved)

- 100 -
12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.20

B-85314EN-1/01
Address

Function
Symbol
Note
R 1355.0
R 1355.1
R 1355.2
R 1355.3
R 1355.4
R 1355.5
R 1355.6
R 1355.7
SO5_0
SO5_1
SO5_2
SO5_3
SO5_4
SO5_5
SO5_6
SO5_7
Alarm message display in progress

Operator message display in progress
Machine status output 1 request
Disabling of ROBODRILL operator's panel
Operator message display in progress 2
Lamp check function ON
R 1356.0
R 1356.1
R 1356.2
R 1356.3
R 1356.4
R 1356.5
R 1356.6
R 1356.7
SO6_0
SO6_1
SO6_2
SO6_3
SO6_4
SO6_5
SO6_6
SO6_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R 1357.0
R 1357.1
R 1357.2
R 1357.3
R 1357.4
R 1357.5
R 1357.6
R 1357.7
SO7_0
SO7_1
SO7_2
SO7_3
SO7_4
SO7_5
SO7_6
SO7_7
Tool breakage
Block skip ON (/, /1)
Switching of operation mode (to MEM mode)
Switching of operation mode (to MDI mode)
Switching of operation mode (to handle mode)
Switching of operation mode (to edit mode)
Machine interior lamp ON
Machine interior cleaning coolant control
12.11
12.35
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.30
12.17
R 1358.0
R 1358.1
R 1358.2
R 1358.3
R 1358.4
R 1358.5
R 1358.6
R 1358.7
SO8_0
SO8_1
SO8_2
SO8_3
SO8_4
SO8_5
SO8_6
SO8_7
4-axis clamp (M10) signal output command

4-axis unclamp (M11) signal output command
5-axis clamp (M68) signal output command
5-axis unclamp (M69) signal output command
Counter 1 (production count) reset
Counter 1 (total production count) reset
Counter 2 (production count) reset
Counter 2 (total production count) reset
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.15
12.15
12.15
12.15
R 1359.0
R 1359.1
R 1359.2
R 1359.3
R 1359.4
R 1359.5
R 1359.6
R 1359.7
SO9_0
SO9_1
SO9_2
SO9_3
SO9_4
SO9_5
SO9_6
SO9_7
Counter screen display
12.15
Alarm output 2 stoppage

Door unlock
Tool group reset request
Power OFF request
No spindle rotating
Low air pressure message cancel
12.10
12.19
12.11
12.31
12.22
The message is not displayed
when this signal is ON.
- 101 -
12.29
12.29
12.16
12.16
12.16
12.13
12.29
12.13

Address
B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Symbol
Note
R 1360.0
R 1360.1
R 1360.2
R 1360.3
R 1360.4
R 1360.5
R 1360.6
R 1360.7
SO10_0
SO10_1
SO10_2
SO10_3
SO10_4
SO10_5
SO10_6
SO10_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R 1361.0
R 1361.1
R 1361.2
R 1361.3
R 1361.4
R 1361.5
R 1361.6
R 1361.7
SO11_0
SO11_1
SO11_2
SO11_3
SO11_4
SO11_5
SO11_6
SO11_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R 1362.0
R 1362.1
R 1362.2
R 1362.3
R 1362.4
R 1362.5
R 1362.6
R 1362.7
SO12_0
SO12_1
SO12_2
SO12_3
SO12_4
SO12_5
SO12_6
SO12_7
Output signal for custom macro (#1000)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1363.0
R 1363.1
R 1363.2
R 1363.3
R 1363.4
R 1363.5
R 1363.6
R 1363.7
SO13_0
SO13_1
SO13_2
SO13_3
SO13_4
SO13_5
SO13_6
SO13_7

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
R 1364.0
R 1364.1
R 1364.2
R 1364.3
R 1364.4
R 1364.5
R 1364.6
R 1364.7
SO14_0
SO14_1
SO14_2
SO14_3
SO14_4
SO14_5
SO14_6
SO14_7
Tool group No. specification 2^0

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
Clamp check (4th axis)

Unclamp check (4th axis)
Clamp check (5th axis)
Unclamp check (5th axis)
- 102 -
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol

Function
Note
R 1365.0
R 1365.1
R 1365.2
R 1365.3
R 1365.4
R 1365.5
R 1365.6
R 1365.7
SO15_0
SO15_1
SO15_2
SO15_3
SO15_4
SO15_5
SO15_6
SO15_7
Spindle override 2^0

12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
R 1366.0
R 1366.1
R 1366.2
R 1366.3
R 1366.4
R 1366.5
R 1366.6
R 1366.7
SO16_0
SO16_1
SO16_2
SO16_3
SO16_4
SO16_5
SO16_6
SO16_7
Cutting override 2^0

12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
R 1367.0
R 1367.1
R 1367.2
R 1367.3
R 1367.4
R 1367.5
R 1367.6
R 1367.7
SO17_0
SO17_1
SO17_2
SO17_3
SO17_4
SO17_5
SO17_6
SO17_7
Robot teach in progress

Interaction/independent operation switch
System start
Robot operation screen display
Cycle stop command
System stop command
Robot reset
Peripheral device ready
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
R 1368.0
R 1368.1
R 1368.2
SO18_0
SO18_1
SO18_2
R 1368.3
SO18_3
R 1368.4
R 1368.5
SO18_4
SO18_5
R 1368.6
R 1368.7
SO18_6
SO18_7
Automatic side door open

Automatic side door closed
Detection of the center through coolant lower
limit
Detection of an abnormal center through coolant
pressure (upper limit)
Detection of clogging of the center through filter
Detection of an abnormal center through coolant
pressure (lower limit)
Overheating of the center through coolant pump
Detection of clogging of the center through
suction filter
12.33
12.33
OFF when the lower limit is
detected.
OFF when an abnormal pressure is
detected.
OFF when clogging is detected.
OFF when an abnormal pressure is
detected.
ON when overheating is detected.
OFF when clogging is detected.
R 1369.0
R 1369.1
R 1369.2
R 1369.3
R 1369.4
R 1369.5
R 1369.6
R 1369.7
SO19_0
SO19_1
SO19_2
SO19_3
SO19_4
SO19_5
SO19_6
SO19_7
Center through coolant pump on/off command

Center through coolant on/off command
Air purge on/off command
Spindle air blow
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Start of the lubrication pump
12.17
12.17
12.17
Air of the spindle blows for ON.
- 103 -
Pump is executing for ON.

B-85314EN-1/01

Function
Address
Symbol
R 1370.0
R 1370.1
R 1370.2
R 1370.3
R 1370.4
SO20_0
SO20_1
SO20_2
SO20_3
SO20_4
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
System being started
(Reserved)
Automatic power-off disable signal
R 1370.5
SO20_5
Rapid traverse LOW selection
R 1370.6
SO20_6
Rapid traverse 100% selection
R 1370.7
SO20_7
R 1371.0
R 1371.1
R 1371.2
R 1371.3
R 1371.4
R 1371.5
R 1371.6
R 1371.7
SO21_0
SO21_1
SO21_2
SO21_3
SO21_4
SO21_5
SO21_6
SO21_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R1372.0
R1372.1
R1372.2
R1372.3
R1372.4
R1372.5
R1372.6
R1372.7
SO22_0
SO22_1
SO22_2
SO22_3
SO22_4
SO22_5
SO22_6
SO22_7
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
R1373.0
R1373.1
R1373.2
R1373.3
R1373.4
R1373.5
R1373.6
R1373.7
SO23_0
SO23_1
SO23_2
SO23_3
SO23_4
SO23_5
SO23_6
SO23_7
Customizing item 1 count signal

12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
R 1374.0
R 1374.1
R 1374.2
R 1374.3
R 1374.4
R 1374.5
R 1374.6
R 1374.7
SO24_0
SO24_1
SO24_2
SO24_3
SO24_4
SO24_5
SO24_6
SO24_7
Optional block skip (/2)

12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
- 104 -
Note
12.33
ON when the automatic power-off
function is disabled.
ON when rapid traverse LOW is
selected. Turn on this signal for
approx. 100 ms.
ON when rapid traverse 100% is
selected. Turn on this signal for
approx. 100 ms.

B-85314EN-1/01
12.1
BASIC SIGNALS
Address
Always ON
Always OFF
ON in a single scanning
cycle at the start of
operation
12.2

Symbol
Function
SI0_0 (R1300.0)
SI0_1 (R1300.1)
SI0_2 (R1300.2)
Always ON during ladder program operation.

Always OFF during ladder program operation.
ON only during a single scan cycle (4 ms) when the ladder
program starts.
SI0_3 (R1300.3)
SI0_4 (R1300.4)
SI0_5 (R1300.5)
Repeats on and off at intervals of about 1 second.

Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.1 seconds.
Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.5 seconds.
MACHINE STATUS
Address

Symbol
Number of the program

being executed
SI2_0 (R1302.0)SI3_7 (R1303.7)
Tool number
SI4_0 (R1304.0)SI4_7 (R1304.7)
Cycle start in progress

Feed hold status
SI7_3 (R1307.3)
SI7_4 (R1307.4)
Alarm state
Reset in progress
SI7_5 (R1307.5)
SI7_6 (R1307.6)
Emergency stop state

Program stop state
SI7_7 (R1307.7)
SI8_6 (R1308.6)
Battery alarm state
SI9_2 (R1309.2)
Auto mode
SI10_6 (R1310.6)
Low air pressure
SI14_5 (R1314.5)
Emergency stop button
SI14_7 (R1314.7)
Feedrate override 100%
SI15_6 (R1315.6)
Spindle speed override

100%
SI15_7 (R1315.7)
Function
The main program number currently selected on the

ROBODRILL is output as binary data.
Example) When O1000 is selected:
Addresses:
R1303
R1302
Bits:
76543210 76543210
Data:
00000011 11101000
The number (magazine number) of the tool currently mounted
on the spindle is output as binary data.
Example) When T14 is mounted:
Address:
R1304
Bits:
76543210
Data:
00001110
ON during automatic operation (including MDI operation).
ON when the stop button lamp on the operator's panel is on
(in the status such as feed hold stop).
ON when an alarm is issued.
ON in the reset status (such as when the reset key on the
operator's panel is pressed, M30 or M02 is specified, or the
machine is in the emergency stop state).
OFF in the emergency stop state.
ON in the automatic operation stop state (when "STOP" is
displayed for the status display on the CNC screen).
ON when the voltage of the CNC memory battery is lower
than or equal to the specified value.
ON when the handle, jog, or manual reference position return
mode is not selected.
ON during memory or DNC operation when K06#7 is 1.
ON when the pressure of air supplied to the ROBODRILL is
lower than the specified value.
OFF when the emergency stop button on the operator's panel
is pressed (the hardware emergency stop circuit is turned
OFF).
ON when the cutting feedrate override switch is placed in the
100% position.
ON when the spindle speed override is 100%.
- 105 -

Symbol
Address
Operation enabled state
SI17_6 (R1317.6)
Tool clamp signal

Tool change signal
Turret recovery mode
Single block
Rapid traverse LOW
Rapid traverse 25%
Rapid traverse 50%
Rapid traverse 100%
Tap return mode
SI38_0 (R1338.0)
SI38_1 (R1338.1)
SI38_2 (R1338.2)
SI38_3 (R1338.3)
SI38_4 (R1338.4)
SI38_5 (R1338.5)
SI38_6 (R1338.6)
SI38_7 (R1338.7)
SI39_0 (R1339.0)
12.3
B-85314EN-1/01
Function
ON when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

<1> The front door is closed.
<2> Door interlock (SO4.6) is OFF.
<3> Feed hold is not in progress.
<4> The automatic mode is set.
<5> The machine is not in the alarm or emergency stop state.
<6> Reset is not in progress.
ON when the tool is clamped.
ON when the tool is changed.
ON when the turret is recovered.
ON when single block is set to ON.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to LOW.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 25%.
ON during tap return operation (ON while the tap return screen
of the maintenance setting screen is displayed).
FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL

Address

Symbol
Function
Door open (M60)

Door open (M61)
Door open (M62)
Door open (M63)
Door open (M64)
Door open (M65)
Automatic door closed state
SI10_0 (R1310.0)
SI17_0 (R1317.0)
SI17_1 (R1317.1)
SI17_2 (R1317.2)
SI17_3 (R1317.3)
SI17_4 (R1317.4)
SI10_1 (R1310.1)
Automatic door open state
SI10_2 (R1310.2)
Automatic door open request

output
Automatic door close request
output
SI11_1 (R1311.1)
ON when the front automatic door is in the closed limit

position (the close limit proximity switch is ON and the
open limit proximity switch is OFF).
ON when the front automatic door is in the open limit
position (the open limit proximity switch is ON and the
close limit proximity switch is OFF).
ON when automatic door open is specified.
SI11_2 (R1311.2)
ON when automatic door close is specified.
Address
Specifying each M code causes the front automatic door

to open.
Each signal is turned ON when the door opens to the limit
position.

Symbol
Door close request
SO3_0 (R1353.0)
External door open control
SO3_1 (R1353.1)
Function
When M60 to M65 is specified, turning this signal ON

causes the front automatic door to close and restarts
operation.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the
relevant command.
Opens the front automatic door. The door is
automatically unlocked. (Door unlock control is not
needed.)
relevant command.
- 106 -

B-85314EN-1/01
Address
External door close control
Symbol
Function
SO3_2 (R1353.2)
Closes the front automatic door. Operation is not

restarted after the door is closed.
relevant command.
[Front automatic door control using M60 to M65]

Opening and closing the automatic door with an M code
Specify M60 to
M65 command
Open automatic
door
Output "door open" signal
Is door close request

signal input?
Close automatic
door
Restart of
operation
In auto (MEM) or MDI mode, issuing a code M60 to M65 causes the automatic door to open.
When the door is open, inputting the appropriate signal to the machine causes the door to close and
operation to restart.
Door open signal: SI10_0, SI17_0 to SI17_4
Door close request signal: SO3_0
CAUTION
1 The door close request signal (from a custom ladder program to a system ladder
program) is effective only when an M60 to M65 command is being executed.
The signal is ignored if the machine is reset or if an M60 to M65 command is not
being executed.
2 When an M60 to M65 command is being executed, the operator message "2001
THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN." is not displayed even if the
door is open.
3 When the robot system standard package option is used, the M60 to M65
functions cannot be used.
- 107 -

12.4
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION
This function allows you to store several machining programs in program storage memory in advance, so
that you can call the desired program later by using a means such as a rotary switch.
Selecting the desired program number using a means such as a rotary switch first and then pressing the
cycle start button causes the specified program to be selected, starting automatic operation.
Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected.
To use the external workpiece number search function, display the QUICK screen,
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.
WORK No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.

Symbol
Address
Workpiece No.
search
Function
Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary

data.
SO0_0 (R1350.0)
SO0_3 (R1350.3)
[Relationship between the signal states and the program numbers to be selected]
Switch 4
Switch 3
Switch 2
Switch 1
Program number to be
(SO0_3)
(SO0_2)
(SO0_1)
(SO0_0)
selected
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
- 108 -
None selected
O0001
O0002
O0003
O0004
O0005
O0006
O0007
O0008
O0009
O0010
O0011
O0012
O0013
O0014
O0015
B-85314EN-1/01

CAUTION
1 This function is available only in automatic operation (MEM mode). It cannot be
used in MDI operation.
2 The effective program numbers are O0001 to O0015.
3 You do not necessarily store in memory the programs corresponding to all
numbers.
4 If the program corresponding to a selected number is not found in memory,
alarm message DS0059, "PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND" is issued when
the function is initiated.
5 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single block
stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection is
executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped.
6 To restart a program at an intermediate point, perform a sequence number
search in automatic operation mode (MEM mode), then initiate the function.
Then, no program number selection is executed, but the program restarts where
it was stopped.
7 When the function is initiated with all the signals being turned OFF, no program
number selection is executed, but the currently selected program is executed.
To execute automatic operation with a program number other than O0001 to
O0015, use the steps below:
Perform a program number search (on the screen).
Turn all the program selection switch signals to "OFF".
Press the operation start button.
8 This function cannot be used together with the external program number search
function.
9 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program
editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS0059 "PROGRAM NUMBER
NOT FOUND" is issued.
- 109 -

12.5
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION
This function allows you to supply a single program number from an external device such as a sequencer
to ROBODRILL, so that that program can be called from the memory in the ROBODRILL control unit.
Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected.
The program number to be selected can be specified using a 4-digit BCD code.
To use the external program number search function, display the QUICK screen,
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.
PROG. No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.
[Interface]
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal
Workpiece No.
search
Program number
data signal
Data read request

signal
External start
signal
Address
Function
SO0_0(R1350.0)
SO0_3(R1350.3)
SO0_0 (R1350.0)
SO0_1 (R1350.1)
SO0_2 (R1350.2)
SO0_3 (R1350.3)
SO0_4 (R1350.4)
SO0_5 (R1350.5)
SO0_6 (R1350.6)
SO0_7 (R1350.7)
SO1_0 (R1351.0)
SO1_1 (R1351.1)
SO1_2 (R1351.2)
SO1_3 (R1351.3)
SO1_4 (R1351.4)
SO1_5 (R1351.5)
SO1_6 (R1351.6)
SO1_7 (R1351.7)
Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary data.
SO2_0 (R1352.0)
When this signal is output, ROBODRILL reads the program

number specified with the program number data signal.
After the program number is selected (while an end-of-selection
signal is being output from the custom ladder program),
outputting this signal causes automatic operation to start. This
signal must be a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer.
(Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.)
SO2_1 (R1352.1)
1 digit in
BCD
A program number is specified as a BCD code.

Those bits that are always 0 need not used.
You can omit them according to the program
numbers used.
10 digits in BCD
100 digits in BCD
1000 digits in BCD
- 110 -

B-85314EN-1/01
(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal
End-of-selection
signal
Address
Function
SI9_0 (R1309.0)
This signal indicates that program number data reading and

program number selection are completed and the machine is now
ready for an automatic operation start.
When this signal is output, turn the data read request signal OFF.
First confirm that this signal has been output, then start automatic
operation using the external start signal.
This signal is turned OFF in the following cases:
Operation start
Reset
Selection of a new program number
[Timing chart for an external program number search]

Program number data signal
Number setting
Data read request signal
ON
External start signal
ON
End of selection
ROBODRILL operation
ON
Number
reading
- 111 -
Selection
Automatic
operation

B-85314EN-1/01
CAUTION
1 This function cannot be used together with the external workpiece number
search function.
2
When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single
block stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection
is executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped.
3
If there is no program corresponding to the selected number in memory, an
alarm (alarm message: DS0059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND) is issued
when an attempt is made to read the program number data.
4 If the data for the program number to be selected is 0, alarm message "DS1128
DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE " is issued. Before the data read request signal is
turned ON, be sure to set a number.
5 You can protect programs with program numbers O8000 to O8999 with the
appropriate NC parameter bit setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#0 (NE8))
Programs with program numbers O9000 to O9999 are protected with the
appropriate parameter setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#4 (NE9))
6 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program
editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS1130 "SEARCH REQUEST NOT
ACCEPTED" is issued.
7 This function cannot be used during an emergency stop or reset.
- 112 -
B-85314EN-1/01
12.6

EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION
This function outputs a specified M code number.

By performing the operation corresponding to the specified M code, an external device can be interlocked
with ROBODRILL.
An M code number is output as a 3-digit BCD code.
To use the external M code BCD output function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/
SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "ON" for "M CODE
OUTPUT BY BCD".
- 113 -

B-85314EN-1/01
[Interface]
Signal
M code number
data signal
Address

Function
SI5_0 (R1305.0)
SI5_1 (R1305.1)
SI5_2 (R1305.2)
SI5_3 (R1305.3)
SI5_4 (R1305.4)
SI5_5 (R1305.5)
SI5_6 (R1305.6)
SI5_7 (R1305.7)
SI6_4 (R1306.4)
SI6_5 (R1306.5)
SI6_6 (R1306.6)
SI6_7 (R1306.7)
Data read request

signal
SI6_0 (R1306.0)
Distribution
completion signal
SI6_1 (R1306.1)
BCD output data

parity check signal
SI6_2 (R1306.2)
1 digit in BCD
A specified M code is output as a BCD code.

Not all data need not necessarily be read.
You can omit reading according to the M codes
used.
10 digits in BCD
100 digits in BCD

This signal indicates that the M code number data signal is being
output.
Read the M code number while this signal is being output.
This signal indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is
specified and the movement along each axis is completed. (This signal
is not usually used.)
The result of a parity check is output.
Parity check
Even parity
check
K01#1 = 0
Odd parity check
K01#1 = 1
Check
signal
0
1
0
1
Parity of specified M
code
K04#5 = 0 K04#5 = 1
Odd
Even
Even
Odd
Even
Odd
Odd
Even
K01#1: Selection between even and odd parity checks

K04#5: Selection between parity check result output states
Signal
Completion signal
(FIN)
Address

Function
S02_5 (R1352.5)
After the operation of the external device is completed, input this

signal.
When the signal is input, ROBODRILL ends M code output, proceeding
to the next block of the program. Turn this signal OFF at the end of the
M code output.
- 114 -
B-85314EN-1/01

[Timing chart for external M code BCD output]

M code number data signal
ON
ON
Data read request signal
ON
ON
Completion signal
ROBODRILL operation
ON
M code specification
ON
M code specification
CAUTION
1 This function cannot be used together with the M code output function.
2 Never use the M codes used by FANUC.(From M00 to M199)
3 When using multiple M code commands, specify the external M code at the first
M code position.
- 115 -

12.7
B-85314EN-1/01
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89)
This function outputs the signal corresponding to a specified M code.

Address
Symbol
Function
M81 output
M82 output
M83 output
SI5_2 (R1305.2)
SI5_3 (R1305.3)
SI5_4 (R1305.4)
M84 output
M80 output
M85 output
M86 output
M87 output
M88 output
M89 output
SI5_5 (R1305.5)
SI5_1 (R1305.1)
SI5_6 (R1305.6)
SI5_7 (R1305.7)
SI6_0 (R1306.0)
SI6_1 (R1306.1)
SI6_2 (R1306.2)
A 100-ms pulse signal is output. (Pulse type)

ON when M83 is specified or OFF when M84 is specified. (ON1
type)
ON when the corresponding M code is specified. (FIN type)
OFF when the completion (FIN) signal (SO2_5) is turned ON.
(ON1 type)
(Pulse type)
M code
specification
Signal output
M code
specification
M81
Signal output
ON
M83
M84
ON
(FIN type)
M code
specification
Signal output
External device
M81
ON
Operation
Completion
signal
If an M code of the pulse or ON1 type is specified, the machine automatically proceeds to the next block
of the program after the output (or stoppage) of the signal.
If an M code of the FIN type is specified, the machine waits for the input of an external completion signal,
then proceeds to the next block of the program after the input of the signal.
CAUTION
Usually, M84 (SI5_5) is not output.
It is output if all M codes M80 to M89 are set to the FIN type.
(Display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE,
then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set FIN TYPE.)
In this case, M81 to M83 are also set to the FIN type.
- 116 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.8
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION

(OPTION)
During the execution of a program, this signal can be turned ON to call another program. For details of
the interrupt type custom macro function, refer to the CNC operator's manual.
Address
Custom macro interrupt
12.9
SO3_4 (R1353.4)
Function
Starts an interrupt type custom macro.
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION

Address
Reset & rewind
12.10

Symbol

Symbol
SO3_5 (R1353.5)
Function
When this signal is ON, the ROBODRILL performs the

following operations:
Decelerates and stops the machine along the controlled
axis along which it is moving.
Enters the reset state.
Cancels the alarms that can be released.
Rewinds the currently selected main program to its top
(not in the MDI mode).
ALARM OUTPUT 2
This signal is mainly used to control the buzzer when an alarm is issued.
Address
Alarm output 2
Symbol
Function
SI17_5(R1317.5)

OFF when an alarm is released.
OFF when the alarm output 2 stop signal (SO9_2) is turned ON.
OFF when K06#2 is 1 and the time specified for timer T06 has
elapsed.

Address
Alarm output 2
stop
Symbol
Function
SO9_2 (R1359.2)
When alarm output 2 (SI17_5) is ON, turning this signal ON turns

alarm output 2 (SI17_5) OFF.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant
command.
- 117 -

12.11
B-85314EN-1/01
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
(1) Reset of a tool group (counter)

A specified tool group (counter) can be reset.
Address
Signal
Tool group (counter)

number
Tool group (counter) reset
request
SO14_0 (R1364.0)
SO14_7 (R1364.7)
SO9_4 (R1359.4)
The number of the tool group (counter) to be reset is

specified as binary data. (0 to 14)
If 0 is specified, the currently selected tool group is assumed.
When this signal is output, ROBODRILL resets the tool group
(counter).
Turn this signal ON after specifying a tool group (counter)
number.
Keep it ON until the reset request reception signal (SI18_5) is
turned ON.
Turn it OFF as soon as the reset request reception signal is
turned ON.

Address
Signal

request reception
SI18_5 (R1318.5)

error
SI18_6 (R1318.6)
Function
Function
This signal indicates that ROBODRILL has accepted a tool

group (counter) reset request.
Turn the reset request signal (SO9.4) OFF after this signal is
turned ON.
This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal
(SO9_4) is turned OFF.
This signal indicates that an error occurred during an attempt
to reset a tool group (counter).
This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal
(SO9_4) is turned OFF.
SUPPLEMENT
To specify 0 as the tool group (counter) number (to specify the currently selected
tool group), specify tool group selection (M06 T1xx) after power-on, then issue a
reset request.
If a reset request is issued without specifying tool group selection, an error
(SI18_6 = ON) occurs.
Tool group number
Group number specification
Tool group reset request
ON
Tool group reset request reception
ON
Tool group reset error
ON
- 118 -

B-85314EN-1/01
(2) Information about the life of each tool group (counter) and the currently selected tool group
(counter) number
Information about the life of each tool group (counter) can be indicated.
The group (counter) number of the tool currently used can be indicated.
Signal

Address
Currently selected tool

group (counter) number
SI32_0 (R1332.0)
SI32_7 (R1332.7)
Tool life end
SI33_0 (R1333.0)
SI34_7 (R1334.7)
SI50_0 (R1400.0)
SI63_7 (R1413.7)
SI35_0 (R1335.0)
SI36_7 (R1336.7)
SI64_0 (R1414.0)
SI77_7 (R1427.7)
Near tool life end
Function
The currently selected tool group (counter) number is indicated

as binary data.
0 is indicated if tool group selection (M06 T1**) has not been
specified since power-on.
Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the
life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the life end
state.
Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the

near life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the near
life end state.
1 can also indicate the life end state.
(3) Others
Signal
Address
Function
Tool life end (tool

group)
Near tool life end
SI10_7 (R1310.7)
ON when at least one of the registered tool groups (counters) is

in the life end state.
ON when the use count (or time) for the currently used tool group
(counter) reaches the value set for advance notice of tool life
end.
SI11_6 (R1311.6)

Signal
Tool breakage
Address
Function
SO7_0 (R1357.0)
When the tool life management function is used and this signal is
ON, the currently used tool is assumed to reach its tool life end. If
a spare tool is registered to the tool group, the new tool is used at
the next tool replacement. If no spare tool is registered, an alarm is
issued at the end of machining.
command.
- 119 -

12.12
B-85314EN-1/01
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL
(1) I/O signals for additional axis clamp control can be assigned with custom PMC.
Address
Function
Clamp check
(4th axis)
Unclamp check
(4th axis)
Clamp check
(5th axis)
Unclamp check
(5th axis)
Clamp request
(5th axis)
Unclamp request
(5th axis)
Clamped
(5th axis)
Signal
SO10_4
(R1360.4)
SO10_5
(R1360.5)
SO10_6
(R1360.6)
SO10_7
(R1360.7)
SI31_0
(R1331.0)
SI31_1
(R1331.1)
SI31_2
(R1331.2)
Clamp request
(4th axis)
Unclamp request
(4th axis)
Clamped
(4th axis)
SI31_3
(R1331.3)
SI31_4
(R1331.4)
SI31_5
(R1331.5)
Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the
system ladder program.
Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the
Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the
Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the
Clamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M68 command is issued.
Unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M69 command is issued.
Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M68 command is issued and OFF when the
M69 command is issued.
Clamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued.
Unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M11 or M72 command is issued.
Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued and OFF when
the M11 or M72 command is issued.
(Sample ladder program)
X4.0
SO10_4
SI31_3
Y2.0
To use this function, set PMC parameter, keep relay K14#3 to 1.

(2) Specifying a command to clamp or unclamp an additional axis.
Signal
Address
4th-axis clamp (M10)

signal output command
SO8_0 (R1358.0)
4th-axis unclamp (M11)

SO8_1 (R1358.1)
5th-axis clamp (M68)

SO8_2 (R1358.2)
5th-axis unclamp (M69)

SO8_3 (R1358.3)
Function
Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (4th

axis).
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.
Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis
(4th axis).
Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (5th
axis).
Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis
(5th axis).
- 120 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.13
OPERATOR'S PANEL
(1) Disabling the operator's panel

This function disables the ROBODRILL operator's panel.
To use this function, set PMC parameter keep relay K16#0 to 1.
Address
Signal description
Disabling of ROBODRILL
operator's panel
SO5_5 (R1355.5)
Function
Turning on this signal disables the ROBODRILL operator's

panel.
Turning on this signal causes the ROBODRILL to behave as follows:
Some buttons and keys on the ROBODRILL operator's panel become unusable.
<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE> key is also made unusable (optionally).
However, <EMERGENCY STOP> button, < FEED HOLD > button, <RESET> key, soft key and
MDI keys (ALPHABET, FIGURE AND ETC.) remain usable.
"OPERATION MODE" switches to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY) MODE."
If OPERATION MODE switching is impossible (for example, for "EMERGENCY STOPPING" or
"MODE SELECTION LOCKING"), however, switching to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE"
does not occur.
For "SPINDLE ROTATING" "IN COOLANT" "CUTTING AIR BLOW" and "CENTER
THROUGH COOLANT OUTPUT" each output is stopped (optionally)
"DRY RUN MODE" and "SINGLE BLOCK MODE" are canceled.
The M01 stop function is canceled (optionally).
The cutting override value is fixed at 100% regardless of the dial setting on the operator's panel.
The spindle override value is fixed at 100%.
The rapid traverse override value is fixed at 100%.
If this signal is issued when the machine is running, it becomes valid after the machine stops.
The diagnosis message "THE OPERATOR'S PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE." appears.
[PMC parameter, keep relay]
Function
Parameter
K16#0
K16#1
Operator's panel disable function

0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply
0 : Canceled
1 : Not canceled
While the operator's panel is disabled, the skip key
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
K16#2
K16#3
K16#4
(2) Disabling the start button

Signal
Disabling of the machine

operator's panel start
button

Address
SO4_0 (R1354.0)
Function
When this signal is ON, the start button on the ROBODRILL

operator's panel is disabled. External start (SO2_1) is
available regardless of the status of this signal.
During turret recovery operation and menu operation, the
start button is available regardless of the status of this signal.
- 121 -

B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Checking the lamps

Signal
Lamp check function ON
12.14

Address
SO5_7 (R1355.7)
Function
When this signal is ON, all LEDs and status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, and 3) on the ROBODRILL
operator's panel are turned on.
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING

Signal
MEM mode selection

MDI mode selection
Handle mode selection
Jog mode selection
Reference mode selection
Edit mode selection
Signal
Switching of operation mode

(to the MEM mode)
(to the MDI mode)
(to the handle mode)
(to the edit mode)

Address
SI8_0 (R1308.0)
SI8_1 (R1308.1)
SI8_2 (R1308.2)
SI8_3 (R1308.3)
SI8_4 (R1308.4)
SI8_5 (R1308.5)

Address
SO7_2 (R1357.2)
Function
ON while the corresponding mode is selected.

The status of MEM mode selection (SI8_0) is related as
follows:
When K14#2 is 0: Memory mode and remote mode
When K14#2 is 1: Only memory mode
Function
Switches to the corresponding operation mode.

Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.
SO7_3 (R1357.3)
SO7_4 (R1357.4)
SO7_5 (R1357.5)
- 122 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.15
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
Address
Function
Production
completion
Signal
SI8_7 (R1308.7)
Production
completion 1
SI11_4 (R1311.4)
Production
completion 2
SI11_5 (R1311.5)
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 or 2 on the

counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or
equal to the scheduled number of products.
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 on the
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 2 on the

Signal
Counter 1
(production count)
reset
Counter 1 (total
production count)
reset
Counter 2
(production count)
reset
Counter 2 (total
production count)
reset
Counter screen
display
Address
S08_4 (R1358.4)
Function
Resets the corresponding counter.

Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.
S08_5 (R1358.5)
S08_6 (R1358.6)
S08_7 (R1358.7)
S09_0 (R1359.0)
Turning this signal ON displays the counter screen.

Turning this signal OFF displays the previous screen again.
- 123 -

12.16
B-85314EN-1/01
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT
The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are
output. Each machine status output signal can be turned ON according to a desired condition.
Signal
Machine status output

1, 2, 3 (END1, 2, 3
output)
Signal
Machine status output

1, 2, 3 request

Address
Function
SI7_0 (R1307.0)
SI7_2(R1307.2)
The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control
of status indication lamps and others are output. These signals
are set to the ON type even if blinking is selected as a screen
setting.
Select the status of each signal on MACHINE STATUS
OUTPUT displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING,
then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from the QUICK screen.
[Signal status]
ALARM:
OPERATOR MESSAGE: ON when an operator message is
displayed.
PROGRAM EXECUTING: ON during the execution of a
program.
PROGRAM END:
ON after the end of program
operation (execution of M00, M01,
M02, or M30).
PRODUCT COMPLETED: ON at the completion of production
(production management function on
the QUICK screen).
FEED HOLD:
ON when the stop button lamp on the
operator's panel is ON.
NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE: ON when the remaining use count for
the last tool in the tool group is
smaller than or equal to the count for
advance notice.

Address
Function
SO5_2 (R1355.2)
SO5_4 (R1355.4)
The relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps

and others are turned ON. When a signal is ON, the
corresponding relay contact is ON.
Since the ON/OFF status of these relay contacts is also
controlled by the system ladder program, the relay contact may
remain ON even when the corresponding signal is OFF. To
control these relay contacts only by the custom ladder program,
set all MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT items to OFF. MACHINE
STATUS OUTPUT is displayed by selecting
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from
the QUICK screen.
- 124 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.17
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT,

CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW
Address
Signal
Machine interior cleaning

coolant output ON
Coolant output ON
Air blow ON
Center through coolant output
ON
Center through coolant pump
ON
Center through coolant ON
Air purge ON
SI9_4 (R1309.4)
SI11_0 (R1311.0)
SI11_3 (R1311.3)
SI11_7 (R1311.7)
SI24_3 (R1324.3)
ON when center through coolant pump ON is specified.
SI24_4 (R1324.4)
SI24_5 (R1324.5)
ON when center through coolant ON is specified.

ON when air purge ON is specified.

Address
Signal
Machine interior cleaning

coolant ON/OFF
SO7_7 (R1357.7)
Center through coolant pump

ON/OFF
Center through coolant
ON/OFF
Center through Air purge
ON/OFF
SO19_0 (R1369.0)
12.18
Function
ON when machine interior cleaning coolant pump ON is

specified.
ON when coolant ON is specified.
ON when air blow ON is specified.
ON when center through coolant ON is specified.
SO19_1 (R1369.1)
SO19_2 (R1369.2)
Function
Controls the machine interior cleaning coolant. Turning

this signal OFF stops the machine interior cleaning
coolant output.
Since the ON/OFF status of the machine interior cleaning
coolant is also controlled by the system ladder program,
the machine interior coolant may not be output by turning
this signal ON.
This signal is not effective when "MACHINE INTERIOR
CLEANING COOLANT" is set to OFF on the standard
selection screen displayed by selecting
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING on the QUICK screen.
This signal is enabled when K14#4 is 1.
The corresponding device is turned ON or OFF.
relevant command. When the command is specified, the
status of each device is changed as follows:
When it is OFF: ON
When it is ON: OFF
COMPLETION OF MACHINING
Signal
Address
End of program
SI9_3 (R1309.3)
Completion of
machining
SI15_5 (R1315.5)
Function
ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified. (M01 is valid only

when the temporary stop key on the operator's panel is ON.)
ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified.
OFF when the next operation starts, the reset key on the
operator's panel is pressed, the emergency stop button is
pressed, or the manual mode is selected.
- 125 -

12.19
B-85314EN-1/01
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL

Signal
Splash guard door

closed state
Address
Function
SI9_5 (R1309.5)
ON when the front door is locked.

Signal
Door unlock
12.20
Address
Function
SO9_3 (R1359.3)
When the front door is locked, turning this signal ON unlocks the
door. When the front door is unlocked and is not open, turning
this signal ON locks the door. When the front door is open, this
signal is not effective. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when
specifying the relevant command.
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL

Signal
Address
Automatic side door

closed state
Automatic side door
open state
SI9_6 (R1309.6)
Function
SI9_7 (R1309.7)
ON when the automatic side door is in the closed limit position (the
proximity switch is ON).
ON when the automatic side door is in the open limit position (the
proximity switch is ON).

Signal
Address
Automatic side door

open request
Automatic side door
close request
Door interlock
SO3_6 (R1353.6)
SO3_7 (R1353.7)
SO4_6 (R1354.6)
Function
While this signal is ON, the air valve for opening the automatic side
door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)
While this signal is ON, the air valve for closing the automatic side
door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)
Turning this signal ON stops program operation, spindle rotation,
coolant output, and other operations in the same way as when the
front door is opened.
- 126 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.21
AI TOOL MONITOR
Signal
Address
Function
Warning level
detection
SI10_3 (R1310.3)
Breakage level
detection
SI10_4 (R1310.4)
12.22
ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle
during machining exceeds the warning level.
OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.
OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)
When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D12 is compared with
the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load
on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON
regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.
ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle
during machining exceeds the breakage level.
OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.
OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)
When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D14 is compared with
the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load
on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON
regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.
SPINDLE
Signal
Address
Function
Spindle stop
SI10_5 (R1310.5)
S command
SI20_0 (R1320.0)
SI23_7 (R1323.7)
M03 command
M05 command
Spindle rotation
button ON
SI24_0 (R1324.0)
SI24_1 (R1324.1)
SI24_2 (R1324.2)
ON when the spindle stops (forward or reverse spindle rotation is

not specified).
The specified S code is output as binary data.
Example) When S8000 is specified
Addresses:
R1323
R1322
R1321
R1320
Bits:
76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210
Data:
00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000
ON when the M03 command is specified.
ON when the M05 command is specified.
On when the spindle rotation/stop button on the operator's panel is
pressed.

Signal
No spindle rotating
Address
SO9_6 (R1359.6)
Function
Spindle rotation is disabled while this signal is ON.

When the spindle is rotating, turning this signal ON stops the
rotation of the spindle. When this signal is ON, specifying spindle
rotation causes an alarm.
- 127 -

12.23
SCREEN DISPLAY
Signal
Display in Japanese
Display in German
Display in French
Display in Italian
Display in Korean
Display in Spanish
Display in English
Display in Chinese
(Simplified)
Display in Portuguese
Display in Russian
12.24
B-85314EN-1/01

Address
Function
ON when the corresponding display language is set.
SI12_0 (R1312.0)
SI12_1 (R1312.1)
SI12_2 (R1312.2)
SI12_4 (R1312.4)
SI12_5 (R1312.5)
SI12_6 (R1312.6)
SI12_7 (R1312.7)
SI37_0 (R1337.0)
SI37_1 (R1337.1)
SI37_2 (R1337.2)
POSITION SWITCH
When the tool is positioned within the operation range specified for NC parameters along a servo axis, the
corresponding signal is turned ON.
(Example 1)
To turn position switch 1 ON within a range between 100.000 and 200.000 along the X-axis:
No. 6910 = 1, No. 6930 = 200.000, No. 6950 = 100.000
(Example 2)
To turn position switch 2 ON within a range between -100.000 and -200.000 along the Y-axis:
No. 6911 = 2, No. 6931 = -100.000, No. 6951 = -200.000
Signal
Address
Position switch 1
SI13_0 (R1313.0)
Position switch 2
SI13_1 (R1313.1)
Position switch 3
SI13_2 (R1313.2)
Position switch 4
SI13_3 (R1313.3)
Position switch 5
SI13_4 (R1313.4)
Position switch 6
SI13_5 (R1313.5)
Position switch 7
SI13_6 (R1313.6)
Position switch 8
SI13_7 (R1313.7)
Function
Axis specification: No. 6910

Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6930
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6950
- 128 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.25
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS
Signal
Movement along the Xaxis

Movement along the Yaxis
Movement along the Zaxis
Movement along the
4th axis
Movement along the
5th axis
Completion of X-axis
reference position
return
Completion of Y-axis
reference position
return
Completion of Z-axis
reference position
return
Completion of 4th-axis
reference position
return
Completion of 5h-axis
reference position
return
Establishment of Xaxis reference position
Establishment of Yaxis reference position
Establishment of Z-axis
reference position
Establishment of 4thaxis reference position
Establishment of 5thaxis reference position
Signal
X-axis interlock
Y-axis interlock
Z-axis interlock
4th-axis interlock
5th-axis interlock

Address
Function
SI14_0 (R1314.0)
ON when the tool is moving along the corresponding axis.

ON when the corresponding axis is selected in handle mode.
SI14_1 (R1314.1)
SI14_2 (R1314.2)
SI14_3 (R1314.3)
SI14_4 (R1314.4)
SI15_0 (R1315.0)
SI15_1 (R1315.1)
SI15_2 (R1315.2)
SI15_3 (R1315.3)
ON at the completion of one of the following operations:

Manual reference position return
Automatic reference position return (G28)
Reference position return check (G27)
OFF when the tool moves from the reference position along the
corresponding axis or the machine enters the emergency stop or
servo alarm state.
Not turned ON when the tool moves to the machine zero point
manually or according to the G00 or G01 command and when
the tool is positioned at the machine zero point along the
corresponding axis at the termination of tool replacement.
SI15_4 (R1315.4)
SI18_0 (R1318.0)
SI18_1 (R1318.1)
SI18_2 (R1318.2)
ON when the reference position is established along the

corresponding axis.
OFF when the reference position is lost.
OFF until the reference position is determined by the absolute
position detector at power-on.
SI18_3 (R1318.3)
SI18_4 (R1318.4)

Address
Function
SO4_1 (R1354.1)
SO4_2 (R1354.2)
SO4_3 (R1354.3)
SO4_4 (R1354.4)
SO4_5 (R1354.5)
Turning these signals OFF inhibits the movement along the

corresponding axes.
When a signal is turned OFF while the tool is moving, the tool
decelerates and stops along the corresponding axis. When the
signal is turned ON, the tool restarts moving.
These signals are effective when K14#5 is 1.
- 129 -

12.26
B-85314EN-1/01
CUSTOM MACROS
Signal
Input signal for

custom macro
(#1100), (#1132)
(#1101), (#1132)
(#1102), (#1132)
(#1103), (#1132)
(#1104), (#1132)
(#1105), (#1132)
(#1106), (#1132)
(#1107), (#1132)
(#1108), (#1132)
(#1109), (#1132)
(#1110), (#1132)
(#1111), (#1132)
(#1112), (#1132)
(#1113), (#1132)
(#1114), (#1132)
(#1115), (#1132)
Input signals for
custom macro
(#1133)
Address
Function
SI25_0 (R1325.0)
ON when macro statement #11**=1 (**: 00 to 15) is executed. OFF

when #11**=0 is specified.
When #1132=nn (nn: 2-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is
output to SI25_0 to SI26_7 as binary data.
SI25_1 (R1325.1)
SI25_2 (R1325.2)
SI25_3 (R1325.3)
SI25_4 (R1325.4)
SI25_5 (R1325.5)
SI25_6 (R1325.6)
SI25_7 (R1325.7)
SI26_0 (R1326.0)
SI26_1 (R1326.1)
SI26_2 (R1326.2)
SI26_3 (R1326.3)
SI26_4 (R1326.4)
SI26_5 (R1326.5)
SI26_6 (R1326.6)
SI26_7 (R1326.7)
SI27_0 (R1327.0)
SI30_7 (R1330.7)
When #1133=nn (nn: 4-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is

output to SI27_0 to SI30_7 as binary data.

Signal
Output signal for

custom macro
(#1000), (#1032)
(#1001), (#1032)
(#1002), (#1032)
(#1003), (#1032)
(#1004), (#1032)
(#1005), (#1032)
(#1006), (#1032)
(#1007), (#1032)
(#1008), (#1032)
(#1009), (#1032)
(#1010), (#1032)
(#1011), (#1032)
(#1012), (#1032)
(#1013), (#1032)
(#1014), (#1032)
(#1015), (#1032)
Address
Function
SO12_0 (R1362.0)
Turning each signal ON sets the corresponding system variable

#1000 to #1015 to 1.
When the signal is OFF, the corresponding system variable is set to
0.
Outputting binary data (2-byte data) to SO12_0 to SO13_7 sets the
data in #1032.
Cannot be used when a pallet changer of KAWATATEC or a tool
monitor of Nodeman is attached.
SO12_1 (R1362.1)
SO12_2 (R1362.2)
SO12_3 (R1362.3)
SO12_4 (R1362.4)
SO12_5 (R1362.5)
SO12_6 (R1362.6)
SO12_7 (R1362.7)
SO13_0 (R1363.0)
SO13_1 (R1363.1)
SO13_2 (R1363.2)
SO13_3 (R1363.3)
SO13_4 (R1363.4)
SO13_5 (R1363.5)
SO13_6 (R1363.6)
SO13_7 (R1363.7)
- 130 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.27
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS
The number of the specified M code (first M code) is output as binary data.
Use these signals together with functional instruction No. 25: binary decode processing for M code
decode and other processing.
(CNC Custom ladder)
Signal
M code
12.28
Address
Function
F10.0 - F13.7
The number of the specified M code is output as binary data.

Example) When M200 is specified:
Addresses :
F13
F12
F11
F10
Bits:
76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210
Data:
00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000
OPERATION CONTROL
Address
Function
External start
Signal
SO2_1 (R1352.1)
External hold
SO2_2 (R1352.2)
External reset
SO2_3 (R1352.3)
External
emergency stop
SO2_4 (R1352.4)
Single block mode

ON
SO2_6 (R1352.6)
Dry run mode ON
SO2_7 (R1352.7)
DNC operation
SO3_3 (R1353.3)
In the memory, remote, or MDI operation mode, turning this signal

ON, then OFF starts operation.
When the machine has a front automatic door and "OPEN DOOR
WITH START BUTTON" of automatic door control is set to ON,
operation starts after the front automatic door is closed. (only
during memory or remote operation)
command.
Turning this signal OFF during operation causes the tool to
decelerate and stop along each servo axis. When this signal is
OFF, memory operation, remote operation, MDI operation, and tool
replacement cannot be started.
Effective when K14#7 is 1.
Turning this signal ON causes the ROBODRILL to perform the
following operations:
Decelerates and stops the tool along the controlled axis along
which it is moving.
Enters the reset state.
Cancels the alarms that can be released.
Turning this signal OFF puts the ROBODRILL into the emergency
stop state. This signal provides emergency stop control at the
software level. Examine emergency stop control at the hardware
level as required.
Turning this signal ON puts the ROBODRILL into the single block
operation mode. Effective when K08#3 is 1. At this time, the single
operation button on the operator's panel is disabled.
Turning this signal ON puts the machine in the dry run operation
mode. Effective when K08#4 is 1. At this time, the dry operation
button on the operator's panel is disabled.
When the memory operation mode is selected, turning this signal
ON puts the machine in the remote operation mode.
- 131 -

12.29
B-85314EN-1/01
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY

Signal
Address
Function
Alarm message
display in progress
SO5_0 (R1355.0)
Operator message
display in progress
SO5_1 (R1355.1)
Operator message
display in progress
2
SO5_6 (R1355.6)
Turn this signal ON when an alarm message is displayed on the

custom PMC.
When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an
alarm message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine
status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking is
selected for alarms)
Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the
custom PMC.
operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking
is selected for operator messages)
This signal is not used when operator message display in progress
2 (SO5_6) is used.
Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the
custom PMC.
operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are not turned ON.
This signal is not used when operator message display in progress
(SO5_1) is used.
12.30
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP

Signal
Machine interior
lamp ON
12.31
Address
Function
SO7_6 (R1357.6)
Turning this signal ON turns the machine interior lamp on. Turning
this signal OFF turns the lamp off.
Effective when K08#0 is 1. At this time, the machine interior lamp
ON/OFF switch on the screen is disabled.
POWER-OFF
Signal
Address
Function
Power OFF request
SO9_5 (R1359.5)
Turns the ROBODRILL control power OFF.

command.
When the command is specified during operation, the control power
is turned OFF after the tool stops moving along axes and the spindle
stops rotating.
- 132 -

B-85314EN-1/01
12.32
OVERRIDE CONTROL
(1) Spindle override

Signal
Spindle override
command
Address
Function
SO15_0 (R1365.0)
SO15_7 (R1365.7)
The spindle override is specified as binary data.

An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.
When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.
When no data is set in R1365 by the custom ladder program at
power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically
set.
Example) To specify 100%
Address: R1365
Bits:
76543210
Data:
01100100
(2) Cutting feed override

Signal
Address
Function
Cutting feed
override command
SO16_0 (R1366.0)
SO16_7 (R1366.7)
The cutting feed override is specified as binary data.

Specify the data [255 (override-to-be-specified)].
An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.
When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.
When no data is set in R1366 by the custom ladder program at
power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically
set.
Example) To specify 100%, set 155.
Address: R1366
Bits:
76543210
Data:
10011011
- 133 -

12.33
B-85314EN-1/01
ROBOT INTERFACE
(1) When only the automatic side door is controlled
Signal

Address
Function
Automatic side door

closed state
Automatic side door
open state
System start
SI78_3 (R1428.3)
Teach mode
Front door open
Interaction mode
SI79_3 (R1429.3)
SI79_4 (R1429.4)
SI79_5 (R1429.5)
Signal
SI9_6 (R1309.6)
SI9_7 (R1309.7)
ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the closed limit
position (the proximity switch for the closed limit position is ON).
ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the open limit
position (the proximity switch for the open limit position is ON).
ON while the system start button is pressed (robot interface X17.4
= 1).
ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).
ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).
ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or
SO17_1 = 1).

Address
Function
Teach mode
SO17_0 (R1367.0)
Interaction/independe
nt operation switch
SO17_1 (R1367.1)
Automatic side door

open
SO18_0 (R1368.0)
Automatic side door

closed
SO18_1 (R1368.1)
System being started

lamp
SO20_2 (R1370.2)
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that

robot teach operation is in progress (valid when K19#0 = 1).
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL is placed in the
interaction mode. (When using this signal, do not use the X17.2
signal of the robot interface.)
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety
gate) is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal
is ON for about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety
gate) is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is
ON for about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the "system being started" lamp is
turned on. (Robot interface Y7.1 is set to ON.)
(2) When the automatic side door and robot system are controlled
Signal

Address
Function
Robot system being

started
Cycle stop mode
SI78_0 (R1428.0)
ON when system operation is being started.
SI78_1 (R1428.1)
System stop mode
SI78_2 (R1428.2)
Teach mode
Front door open
Interaction mode
SI79_3 (R1429.3)
SI79_4 (R1429.4)
SI79_5 (R1429.5)
ON when the cycle stop mode is set with the soft key [CYCLE
STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the cycle
stop command output from the custom PMC.
OFF when the cycle stop mode is terminated or canceled.
ON when the system stop mode is set with the soft key [SYSTEM
STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the system
stop command output from the custom PMC.
OFF when the system stop mode is terminated or canceled.
ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).
ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).
ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or
SO17_1 = 1).
- 134 -

B-85314EN-1/01

Address
Function
Teach mode
Signal
SO17_0 (R1367.0)
Interaction/independ
ent operation switch
SO17_1 (R1367.1)
Robot system start
SO17_2 (R1367.2)
Robot operation
screen display
SO17_3 (R1367.3)
This signal is used when an address other then the robot teach inprogress signal (X225.7) of the robot system is to be used or when a
condition is to be added.
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that robot
teach operation is in progress. (This signal is valid when K19#0 =
1.)
This signal provides the same function as the
interaction/independent input (X17.2) of the robot interface. When
this signal is set to ON, the robot system is placed in the interaction
mode.
(When using this signal, do not use X17.2.)
This signal provides the same function as the system start input
(X17.4) of the robot interface. When this signal is set to ON, system
operation is started. When using this signal, ensure that this signal
is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#3 = 1.)
When this signal is set to ON, the robot operation screen is
displayed.
When this signal is set to OFF, the screen display returns to the
previous screen.

Signal
Address
Function
Robot system cycle

stop command
SO17_4 (R1367.4)
Robot system stop

command
SO17_5 (R1367.5)
Robot reset
SO17_6 (R1367.6)
Peripheral device
ready
SO17_7 (R1367.7)
Automatic side door

open
SO18_0 (R1368.0)
Automatic side door

closed
SO18_1 (R1368.1)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [CYCLE
STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,
the cycle stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during the
cycle stop mode, the cycle stop mode is canceled. When using this
signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#0 = 1. When this signal is valid, the
[CYCLE STOP] key cannot be used.)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [SYSTEM
STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,
the system stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during
the system stop mode, the system stop mode is canceled. When
using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
[SYSTEM STOP] key cannot be used.)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [ROBOT
RESET] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to
ON, the reset signal is output to the robot. When using this signal,
ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
[ROBOT RESET] key cannot be used.)
This signal posts the ready state of the peripheral device in the robot
system. Ensure that this signal is set to ON when the peripheral
device is ready. When this signal is OFF, system operation cannot
be started.
(This signal is valid when K21#4 = 1.)
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)
is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for
about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)
is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for
about 100 ms.
- 135 -

12.34
B-85314EN-1/01
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item
At the Periodical Maintenance Screen, cumulative value of customize item can be counted with the
desired condition by using following custom signal.
Signal
Address
Function
Customizing item 1
count signal
Customizing item 2
count signal
Customizing item 3
count signal
Customizing item 4
count signal
Customizing item 5
count signal
Customizing item 6
count signal
Customizing item 7
count signal
Customizing item 8
count signal
SO23_0 (R1373.0)
When CUSTOM (TIME) is selected as Count type, count the time

during the corresponding custom signal is ON.
When CUSTOM (COUNT) is selected as Count type, count the
number of the corresponding custom signal is changed from OFF to
ON.
12.35
SO23_1 (R1373.1)
SO23_2 (R1373.2)
SO23_3 (R1373.3)
SO23_4 (R1373.4)
When using CUSTOM (COUNT) as Count type, corresponding

signal is turned on more than 500 msec by custom ladder. If that
time is short, counting number may be skipped.
SO23_5 (R1373.5)
SO23_6 (R1373.6)
SO23_7 (R1373.7)
BLOCK SKIP
Effective when K08#1 is 1. At this time, the block skip buttons on the screen (standard operator's panel)
and operator's panel (operator's panel with the full keyboard) are disabled.
Signal
Block skip ON
( /, /1 )
Block skip ON
( /2 )
Block skip ON
( /3 )
Block skip ON
( /4 )
Block skip ON
( /5 )
Block skip ON
( /6 )
Block skip ON
( /7 )
Block skip ON
( /8 )
Block skip ON
( /9 )
Address
Function
SO7_1 (R1357.1)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip (/, /1) function.
SO24_0 (R1374.0)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /2 ) function.
SO24_1 (R1374.1)
SO24_2 (R1374.2)
SO24_3 (R1374.3)
SO24_4 (R1374.4)
SO24_5 (R1374.5)
SO24_6 (R1374.6)
SO24_7 (R1374.7)
- 136 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
13
USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL

INSTRUCTIONS
(Variable timer) Functional instruction No.: 3
Do not write any instructions

in this area.
Timer No.
Timer relay
Timer start
condition
After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.
The effective timer Nos. are 121 to 200.
For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.
Set the desired timer value on the PMC parameter - Timer screen.
The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.
(Fixed timer) Functional instruction No.: 24
Timer No.

in this area.
Time that the

timer is set for
Timer relay
Timer start
condition
After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.
The effective timer Nos. are 1 to 140.
For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.
The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.
- 137 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(Rising edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 57

in this area.
Start condition
Register No.
Output
If the start condition turns ON, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.
The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.
The valid register No. range is the same as that for the falling edge detection function (SUB58).
(Falling edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 58
??

in this area.
Start condition
Register No.
Output
If the start condition turns OFF, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.
The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.
The valid register No. range is the same as that for the rising edge detection function (SUB57).
- 138 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(Counter) Functional instruction No.: 5

in this area.
Counter No.
Control condition
CN0
UPDOWN
RST
ACT
Countup output
Control
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Function
Starts the counter with 0.
Starts the counter with 1.
Up counter
Down counter
Cancels a reset.
Resets a counter.
Deactivates a timer.
Activates a timer.
The output turns ON when the setting becomes equal to the count.
The effective counter Nos. are 40 to 69.
To control RST and ACT, use a pulse signal. RST and ACT function at the rising edge of a pulse
signal.
For the counter output, you can specify any desired address.
Enter the desired setting on the PMC parameter - Counter screen.
The effective counter settings are 0 to 32767.
- 139 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(Jump) Functional instruction No.: 10

(Jump end)
Functional instruction No.: 30
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
Number of coils to jump over
Do not write any instructions in these areas.
If the start condition turns ON, control jumps over the specified number of coils without executing
them at all.
If specifying the number of coils, do not use JMPE (SUB30).
If the number of coils is set to 0, control jumps over the JMP (SUB10) to JMPE (SUB30) section.
Control jumps over any functional instructions.
(Common line control)

(Common line control end) Functional instruction No.: 29
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
No. of coils to be turned off
Do not write any instructions in these areas.
If the start condition turns OFF, the specified number of coils are turned OFF.
If specifying the number of coils, do not use COME (SUB29).
If the number of coils is set to 0, the COM (SUB9) to COME (SUB29) section are turned OFF.
Any functional instructions will be executed even if the start condition with the COM instruction is
OFF, but the output of the execution results will be turned OFF.
In a range specified with a COM, you cannot specify another COM.
The output of WRT.NOT (inverted output of logic operation result) will be "1" if the start condition
with the COM instruction is OFF.
- 140 -
B-85314EN-1/01
(Binary decoding) Functional instruction No.: 25
A
B
C
Start
condition
D
The following explanation is limited to those cases in which specified M codes are to be decoded.
Parameter
A
Format specification
B
C
Code data address

Decoding instruction No.
Decoding result output

address
Function
Set a format in the format of 0nn4, where nn specifies that 8 x nn M codes are
to be decoded.
nn may be 0 to 99.
If 0 is specified, eight M codes will be decoded.
Examples:
To decode M200 to M205, set 0014(14).
Set F10.
Specify the number of the first M code to be decoded.
Example:
To decode M codes starting with M200, set 200.
Specify an unused internal relay (R address).
If the nn in the format specification is 0 or 1, 1 bytes is required; otherwise,
consecutive nn bytes are required.
In the above examples:

If M200 is specified, R2100.0 is ON.
:
- 141 -

(Conditional subprogram call)
(Unconditional subprogram call)
B-85314EN-1/01

Subprogram number called

Call condition
If the conditional subprogram call instruction CALL (SUB65) is specified, the specified subprogram
is called only when the call condition is ON.
If the unconditional subprogram call instruction CALLU (SUB66) is specified, the specified
subprogram is called unconditionally.
- 142 -
14.SETTING PARAMETERS
B-85314EN-1/01
14
SETTING PARAMETERS
Parameter
K03#6
K08#0
Function
K14#2
Center through coolant pump control

ON/OFF control of the lamp inside the
machine
Block skip ON/OFF control
Single-block ON/OFF control
Dry run ON/OFF control
Custom PMC editing
Spindle/cutting override control by custom
PMC
Signal "ON" condition of S18.0
K14#3
Additional axis clamp control signal
K14#4
K14#5
K14#6
K14#7
K15#7
K16#0
K16#1
Machine interior cleaning coolant control

Interlock control for each axis
Emergency stop control
Feed hold control
Custom PMC function
Operator's panel disable function
While the operator's panel is in the disabled
state, the M01 stop button
While the operator's panel is in the disabled
state, the door open/close button
While the operator's panel is disabled,
spindle rotation and coolant supply
While the operator's panel is disabled, the
skip key
Teaching signal control
Cycle stop control
System stop control
Robot reset control
System startup control
K08#1
K08#3
K08#4
K14#0
K14#1
K16#2
K16#3
K16#4
K19#0
K25#0
K25#1
K25#2
K25#3
K
#*
: PMC parameter, keep relay

: *-th bit
- 143 -
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Enabled
Not controlled
0: Memory mode and

remote mode
0: Standard address
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Disabled
Controlled
1: Memory mode only
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0 : Disables
1: Allocated with custom

PMC
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1 : Enables
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
0 : Canceled
1 : Not canceled
0 * Disables
1 : Enables
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
15
15.1
B-85314EN-1/01
ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen
The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be displayed on the PMC alarm screen.
Alarm number
ER01 PROGRAM DATA
ERROR
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE

OVER
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE

ERROR(OPTION)
ER04 PMC TYPE

UNMATCH
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
<1> Enter the sequence program again.

<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again, the
error may be due to a hardware fault. In
that case, contact us.
<1> Reduce the size of the sequence
program.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
<1> Reduce the size of the sequence
program.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
Change the sequence program so that it
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using the
programmer.
The sequence program is invalid.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH
Contact us.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK

ERROR. PLEASE TURN ON
POWER AGAIN WITH
PRESSING 'O'&'Z'. (CLEAR
PMC SRAM)
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY
<1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, by

holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at the
same time.
<2> Replace the backup batteries.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA

ERROR BY I/O
ER19 LADDER DATA
ERROR
<1> Enter the sequence program again.

entered the sequence program again, the
error may be due to a hardware fault. In
that case, contact us.
Enter the sequence program again.
Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen again, and terminate the editing
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.
ER22 NO PROGRAM
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM
IS OUT OF RANGE
Enter the sequence program again.

Correct the sequence program; change the
parameter number specified in a functional
instruction to a value that is within the
allowable range.
ER33 I/O Link ERROR(CHn)

(Note3)
Contact us; replace the faulty hardware.
- 144 -
The sequence program is too

large to load into the save area.
The sequence program exceeds

the size specified by the ladder
step count option.
The PMC type specified in the

sequence program does not
match the type of the PMC
actually in use.
An unsupported function is used
in the sequence program.
The nonvolatile memory of the
PMC system needs to be
initialized in such cases as when
you have changed the PMC
model.
The parity of the sequence
program is invalid.
Reading sequence program was

interrupted.
During editing the ladder, the
screen display is switched to a
CNC screen by the operation of a
function key.
The sequence program is empty.
An out-of-range parameter
number is specified in the TMR,
TMRB, TMRBF, CTR, CTRB,
DIFU, or DIFD functional
instruction.
The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
ER34 ER34 I/O Link ERROR
(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT

DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)

<1> Check the cable connections to the
devices of group xx.
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in which
the PMC control module is embedded.
Reduce the output data count of group xx.
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT

DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)
Reduce the input data count of group xx.
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN

BASE(CHn)
(Note3)
Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or

less.
ER38 MAX SETTING

OUTPUT DATA OVER(CHn
Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)
<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total

amount of output data of all groups to 128
bytes or less.
<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total
amount of output data of all groups to 256
bytes or less.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT

DATA OVER(CHn xx)
(Note1)(Note3)
<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total

amount of input data of all groups to 128
bytes or less.
<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total
amount of input data of all groups to 256
bytes or less.
ER43 PROGRAM DATA

ERROR(PT/NT)
<1> Store sequence program which is

compiled again after recompilations using
FANUC LADDER-III.
<2> If you see the same alarm again after
<1>, contact us.
Add a required function block option.
ER45 NO OPTION
(FUNCTION BLOCK)
- 145 -
Contents
An I/O device communication
error occurred on the slave side
of group xx.
The output data count of I/O Link

group xx exceeds the upper limit
(33 bytes).
Or the output data count of I/O
Link i group xx exceeds the
upper limit (65 bytes for the
normal I/O, 29 bytes for the
safety I/O).
The superfluous data is regarded
as invalid.
The input data count of I/O Link
group xx exceeds the upper limit
(33 bytes).
Or the input data count of I/O
Link i group xx exceeds the
upper limit (65 bytes for the
normal I/O, 29 bytes for the
safety I/O). The superfluous data
is regarded as invalid.
The slot number for the I/O Link
exceed the upper limit (10). The
slot number larger than 11 is
regarded as invalid.
The I/O area for the I/O Link is
insufficient.
(The area allocated to the group
xx and later on the output side
is regarded as invalid.)
In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area
is insufficient in the normal
update cycle mode.
The I/O area for the I/O Link is
insufficient.
(The area allocated to the group
xx and later on the input side is
regarded as invalid.)
In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area
is insufficient in the normal
update cycle mode.
No function block option is

specified.

Alarm number
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
ER46 MESSAGE DATA

UPDATE ERROR.
PLEASE TRUN OFF
POWER AFTER SAVING
DATA.
Save the corrected sequence program or

message data for multi-language display to FROM. Moreover, turn the power off/on.
ER47 ILLEGAL OVERRIDE

FUNCTION SETTING (TOO
MANY PMC PATHS)
The override mode of the force I/O function is

available in 3 or less PMC paths in same time.
In some PMC paths, make the function invalid.
Moreover, turn the power off/on.
Remove the setting of exceeding setting time
on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR
SETTING screen.
The message data in the

sequence program or the
message data for multi-language
display cannot be updated. It is
necessary to turn off/on the
power. The ladder program
cannot be executed when this
alarm occurs.
The override function is enabled
in four or more PMC paths.
ER48 STEP SEQUENCE

TIME OVER(xxH)
ER50 PMC EXECUTION

ORDER ERROR
ER51 PMC EXECUTION
PERCENTAGE ERROR
Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to 11904.
ER52 I/O Link CHANNEL

ASSIGNMENT ERROR
(Note3)
ER54 NC-PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR
ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION
CYCLE ERROR
ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR
ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE
SETTING ERROR
ER60 I/O Link i
ERROR(CHn)
(Note3)
ER61 I/O Link i ERROR(CHn
Gxx)
(Note1) (Note3)
ER62 I/O Link i DCS ERROR

(Note3)
ER63 I/O Link CHANNEL
SETTING ERROR
(Note3)
ER64 I/O Link i TOO MANY

CONNECTED
GROUPS(CHn)
(Note3)

Check CNC parameter No. 11930.
Check CNC parameter No. 11932.
Check CNC parameter No.11940 to No.11944.
Contact us. Exchange of the hardware.
<1> Check the cable connected to the device

of group xx.
<2> Check the power supply of the I/O device
if the power is turned on earlier than the
power of CNC.
<3> Exchange the I/O device in group xx in
which PMC control module is built.
Contact us. Exchange of the hardware.
<1> Change the channel configuration in order
to reduce the I/O points. As for the
communication method for each channel,
specify the CNC parameter No. 11933#0
and 1.
Reduce the number of connected I/O devices

to 24 or less.
- 146 -
The activated condition of step

sequence exceeds the time limit,
which is set on the STEP
SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR
SETTING screen.
The execution order setting of the
multi-PMC function is invalid.
The execution percentage setting
of the multi-PMC function is
invalid.
The I/O Link channel assignment
to the PMC system is invalid.
The interface assignment
between NC and PMC is invalid.
The ladder level 1 execution
cycle setting is invalid.
The assignment of multi-path
PMC interface is invalid.
The setting of PMC Memory
Type is invalid.
The LSI for I/O Link i is faulty.
The connection error occurred in

the slave of group xx.
The LSI for I/O Link i DCS is

faulty.
Total I/O points are over
4096/4096 points in system.
For the I/O Link, the I/O points
are 1024/1024 points for one
channel. For the I/O Link i,
2048/2048 points for one
channel.
25 or more of I/O devices are
connected in channel n.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number

Contents

SLOTS(CHn)
(Note3)
ER66 I/O Link i PMC
ADDRESS OVERLAPPED
(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)
(Note3)
Reduce the number of connected I/O modules

to 256 or less.
257 or more of I/O modules are

connected in channel n.
Enter the PMC address or size again so that

any address is not used by multiple PMCs that
share PMC memory.

SAFETY I/O GROYPS
(Note3)
Reduce the group number of safety I/O.

ASSIGNMENTS IN HIGH
SPEED MODE (CHn,Gyy)
(Note1) (Note3)
When there are some groups which is set to

high-speed update cycle mode in I/O Link i,
Correct the transmission timing. Refer to
subsection 3.4.6.
ER69 I/O Link i

ASSIGNMENT ADDRESS
INVALID(CHn Gyy)
(Note2)(Note3)
ER70 PMC ADDRESS
BLOCK OVERLAPPED
BETWEEN I/O Link AND I/O
Link i(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)
(Note3)
Correct the assignment data of I/O Link i.
The address X(Y)nnnn

assigned in PMC path m is
assigned to another PMC path
that is shared the common
memory with PMC path m.
The total group number of safety
I/O in PMC paths exceed 4 or the
total group number of safety I/O
in DSCPMC exceed 4 for I /O
Link i.
In the channel n, the
transmission size exceeds the
limit of high-speed mode for I/O
Link i. The assignment of group
yy or later cannot be performed.
The address of false PMC path is
assigned in group yy of channel
n of I/O Link i assignment data.
ER71 I/O Link i STATUS

ALARM LENGTH OVER IN
GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)
ER89 EDITING I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA IS
NOT COMPLETED
ER90 TOO LARGE I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
(Note3)
ER91 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA PARITY
(Note3)
DATA ERROR BY I/O
ER93 UNSUPPORTED I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
(Note3)
DATA ERROR
(Note3)
<1> Delete the assignment data for I/O Link i

or correct the assignment address.
<2> Correct the X/Y address block of the I/O
Link channel. (The setting of Machine
signal interface of PMC configuration
parameter)
<3> Check the communication method of I/O
Link. (NC parameter 11933#0,#1)
<4> Check the setting of the selectable
assignment data function for I/O Link i.
Correct the configuration of I/O devices and
reduce the total of the status alarms to
64bytes or less.
Finish the edit of I/O configuration data.
Reduce the I/O configuration data file.
<1> Input I/O configuration data file again.

<2> When re-input cannot solve this error, the
hardware may be failure. Contact us.
Input I/O configuration data file again.
There is a PMC address block

which is assigned in both I/O Link
and I/O Link i.
The total of the status alarms for

I/O devices connected with group
xx of channel n exceeds 64
bytes
I/O configuration data is invalid
because that the editing of the
I/O configuration data is in the
midst.
I/O configuration data is larger
than the save area or invalid.
The parity of I/O configuration
data is invalid.
Correct the type of I/O configuration data and

input again.
Reading of I/O configuration file

is interrupted.
The type of I/O configuration data
is invalid.
Re-compile the I/O configuration data by FLIII. Moreover, input again.
Data configuration of I/O

configuration data is abnormal.
- 147 -

Alarm number
ER95 I/O DEVICE
MISMATCH(CHn)
(Note3)
ER96 I/O Link MAX GROUP

OVER(CHn)
(Note3)
ER97 I/O Link FAILURE(CHn

Gxx)
(Note1) (Note3)
WN02 OPERATE PANEL

ADDRESS
ERROR

When this alarm occurs on a well-worked
machine, the causes may be following:
<1> Disconnection of communication cable or
contact fault.
<2> The power of an I/O device is turned off.
Or the power on is delayed.
<3> The failure of an I/O device.
<4> The power of some I/O devices remain
when the power of CNC is turned off/on.
Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on
When this alarm occurs during a debugging of
sequence program, the following causes also
come up.
<5> The configuration (type, order or number)
of the I/O devices is wrong.
<6> Invalid I/O configuration data is registered.
You can confirm the error I/O device in the I/O
Device Monitor screen.
<1> Check the PMC paths and addresses of
first and second blocks of n channel on
configuration parameter setting screen.
<2> Check the total groups of first and second
block on I/O module assignment.
<3> Check the parameter setting of
"Selectable I/O Link assignment
function".
When this alarm occurs on a well-worked
machine, the cause may be following.
<1> The failure of the cable or contact from
group (xx 1) to xx.
<2> The power of an I/O device of group xx
or later is turned off. Or the power on is
delayed.
<3> The failure of an I/O device of group xx
or (xx 1).
<4> The power of some I/O devices remain
Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on
If this alarm occurs during a debugging of
sequence program, the following causes also
come up.
<5> The group number of I/O device is invalid.
<6> The mistake of the assignment setting of
I/O modules.
<7> The mistake of the parameter setting of
"Selectable I/O Link assignment function"
<8> The mistake of the machine signal
interface setting.
You can confirm the details of the error in the
I/O Device Monitor screen.
Correct the Series 0 operator's panel address
that is set in the PMC system parameter.
- 148 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
This alarm occurs when actual
I/O devices connected to CNC
differ from the I/O configuration
data registered in the I/O Device
Monitor screen. The ladder
program runs regardless of the
occurrence of this alarm.
When dual assignment of I/O

Link channel is used, total groups
of first and second block exceeds
16 groups.
The ladder program runs
regardless of the occurrence of
this alarm.
This alarm occurs when less I/O
devices are connected.
This alarm occurs when a total
group count of the I/O module
assignment are different with one
of connected device count.
The ladder program runs
regardless of the occurrence of
this alarm.
The Series 0 operator's panel

address that is set in the PMC
system parameter is invalid.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number

WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN
Modify the ladder program and turn on the

power of the CNC again. Refer to subsection
4.15 for details.
WN07 LADDER SP
ERROR(STACK)
Correct the sequence program so that the

subprogram has eight or fewer levels of
nesting.
WN09 SEQUENCE
PROGRAM IS NOT
WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM
If you want to use the current sequence

program next time you power on the system,
write the sequence program to flash ROM. If
you have made any unwanted change to the
sequence program by mistake, read the
original sequence program from flash ROM.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP
SEQUENCE)
<1> Add the step sequence option.

<2> Arrange so that the step sequence
subprogram will not be called.
WN11 INCOMPATIBLE
FUNCTION
WN58 UNSUPPORTED
FUNCTION
Compile the sequence program again with

FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing
Package.
The Override function is for debugging only.
So, please disable the function when shipping
the machine.
Correct the sequence program with Ladder
editing function on PMC screen.
WN59 MESSAGE FILE

SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.
WN60 MESSAGE FILE

SYMBOL INVALID
WN61 MESSAGE FILE

ADDRESS DUPLICATE
WN62 MESSAGE FILE

NUMBER ERROR
WN57 OVERRIDE
FUNCTION IS ACTIVE
- 149 -
Contents
The ladder program was stopped
while communication was in
progress between CNC and
PMC.
This alarm may cause the
WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and
DISPB functional instructions to
malfunction.
There are too many levels of
nesting (levels more than 8) for
the CALL or CALLU functional
instruction to call the
subprogram.
You have changed the sequence
program using the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or
DATA I/O screen, but you have
not yet written the changed
sequence program to flash ROM.
If you shut down the system
without writing the changed
sequence program to flash ROM,
the changes you have made will
be lost next time you turn on the
power.
No step sequence option was
found when the system
attempted to execute a step
sequence.
An incompatible functional
instruction is used in the
sequence program.
The Override function is
activated.
An unsupported functional
instruction is used in the
sequence program. The
functional instruction was
skipped.
In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol that
does not exist in the ladder is
defined.
In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol other
than an A address is defined.
The A address area has a
duplicate definition between a
symbol and address or between
symbols.
A message number differs
between the ladder and message
file for multi-language display at
the same A address.

Alarm number
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
WN63 MESSAGE FILE IS

NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH
ROM
If you want to use the current message file for

multi-language display next time you power on
the system, write the message file to flash
ROM.
WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE

OVER
<1> Reduce the size of the message file for

multi-language display.
<2> Contact us and specify an option for a
larger size.
WN65 MESSAGE FILE

MISMATCH
Contact us.
WN66 MESSAGE FILE

PARITY
<1> Enter the message file for multi-language

display again.
entered the message file for multilanguage display again, the error may be
due to a hardware fault. In that case,
contact us.
Enter the message file for multi-language
display again.
You have changed the message

data for multi-language display
using DATA I/O screen, but you
have not yet written the changed
message data to flash ROM. If
you shut down the system
without writing the changed
message data to flash ROM, the
changes you have made will be
nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
The message file for multilanguage display is too large to
load into the save area.
The message file for multilanguage display is invalid.
An unsupported function is used
in the message file for multilanguage display.
The parity of the message file for
multi-language display is invalid.
WN67 MESSAGE FILE

ERROR BY I/O
WN68 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA IS NOT WRITTEN TO
FLASH ROM
If you want to make updated I/O configuration

data effective, write the data to Flash ROM.
- 150 -
Reading the message file for

multi-language display was
interrupted.
The I/O configuration data was
updated in the I/O configuration
editor screen or data I/O screen
but the data has not been written
to Flash ROM yet. The data will
be lost if the save operation is not
performed.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM
(CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm
Ybbb = **H )
(Note1)

Check DO of the relevant device.
Contents
The DO alarm (ex. a short circuit
with the ground) occurs at byte
zz of slot yy of group xx in
channel n.
Y bbbb of PMC path m is the
address at which the alarm
occurred.
DCSPMC Ybbbb is the address
for DCSPMC.
Display of PMC*Y**** is the
case of occurrence of
unassigned address.
WN70 I/O Link i STATUS

ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz =
**H)
(Note1)
Check the alarm information of applied I/O

device.
The **H shows some bits at

which the alarm occurs by
hexadecimal.
(Ex. PMC1Y115=28H shows
the alarm occurs at Y115.3 and
Y115.5 in PMC1. 28H means
00101000 in binary. )
For the details of the alarm of I/O
devices, refer to the
CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE).
The status alarm except for the
DO alarm occurs at byte zz of
slot yy of group xx in channel
n.
The **H shows some bits at
which the alarm occurs by
hexadecimal.
For the details of the alarm of I/O
devices, refer to the
CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE).
NOTE
1 The displayed group number in ER34, ER35, ER36, ER38, ER39, ER61, ER68,
ER71, ER97, WN69 and WN70 is wiring number of I/O device.
2 The group number displayed in ER69 is the number of I/O Link i assignment
data.
3 When some PMC alarms related to I/O Link and I/O Link i occur, all of I/O
devices in all of channels do not be liked with the CNC.
- 151 -
15.2
B-85314EN-1/01
PMC System Alarm Messages
Error Messages when SYS_ALM199 (PMC General)

Alarm number
PC004 CPU INVALID INSTRUCTION
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC006 CPU INVALID SLOT
INSTRUCTION
----------------------------------------PC009 CPU ADDRESS ERROR
----------------------------------------PC010 DMA ADDRESS ERROR
----------------------------------------PC012 CPU USER BREAK
EXCEPTION
----------------------------------------PC030 RAM PARITY
PC030 S-RAM PARITY
----------------------------------------PC060 BUS ERROR
----------------------------------------PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE (PMCn)
PC070 LADDER SPE(PMCm)
----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE (PMCn)
----------------------------------------PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (TASK:xx)
PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (INT:xx)
----------------------------------------PC080 SYSTEM EMERGENCY
-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a main
board fault.
Contents
A CPU error occurred in the PMC
system.
A RAM parity error occurred in

the PMC system.
A bus error occurred in the PMC

system.
A stack error occurred with the

SPE functional instruction of the
ladder program of n path.

FBE functional instruction of the
ladder program of path n.
A stack error occurred. (detected
by the software).
System emergency state of the

PMC LSI.
- 152 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
PC090 SYSTEM EMERGENCY

(SOFTWARE)
PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT
(SOFTWARE)
PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT
(UNKNOWN)
----------------------------------------PC093 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT
(xx)
----------------------------------------PC094 UNEXPECTED TRAP
EXCEPTION (xx)
----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR
(PMCn)
----------------------------------------PC096 LADDER CODE ERROR (___)
----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (PMCm)
----------------------------------------PC098 PMC SOFTWARE CRC ERROR
PC098 PMC SOFTWARE ECC ERROR
(_____:_)
----------------------------------------PC501 CNC/PMC INTERFACE ERROR
(PATHn)
-----------------------------------------
Contents
CPU error (unexpected NMI)
occurs in PMC control software.
A trap exception of unknown

cause occurred with the PMC
control software.
RAM check error occurred.
The read or write operation

between CNC and PMC failed
- 153 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Error Messages when SYS_ALM197 (PMC General)

Alarm number
PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE
(DCSPMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD
----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE
(DCSPMC)
----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR
(DCSPMC)
----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR
(DCSPMC)
-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a CPU
card fault.
Contents
SPE functional instruction of the
ladder program of DCSPMC.

FBE functional instruction of the
ladder program of DCSPMC.
RAM check error occurred.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM196 (PMC Watch Dog)

Alarm number
PC073 WATCH-DOG ALARM(CNC<>PMC)
-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a main
board fault.
Contents
The PMC CPU is not running.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM195 (I/O Link)

Alarm number
PC050 I/O Link ER1 CHn:GRxx:yy
COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn :
GROUP xx
-----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn / GROUPxx
----------------------------------------

<1> Check the I/O device of group
xx in channel n
Instantaneous power failure
Unstable power line
<2> Check the I/O Link cable
between JD1B of group xx
and JD1A of group xx-1
faulty wiring
incomplete contact
<3> The I/O Link device of group
xx in channel n is faulty.
- 154 -
Contents
An I/O Link communication error
occurred.
n is a channel number (1 to 3).
xx is a group number (0 to 15).
yy is a internal error code.
This error occurs when the
communication with the device of
group xx in channel n is
stopped.
The causes are as follows:
Instantaneous power failure,
unstable voltage or unstable
power line of the device
Faulty wiring or incomplete
contact of communication cable
Faulty device
Please note that It may not show
an accurate group number with
some conditions of the problem.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
PC051 I/O Link ER2 CHn:yy:xx:ww:vv

COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn
-----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn
----------------------------------------
<1> When you use an I/O UnitModel A, no base extension

unit is connected corresponding
to an I/O assignment data.
Check connection of I/O
devices and I/O assignment
data.
<2> When you use Power Mate as
I/O Link slave device and/or
Servo Motor Beta series I/O
Link option, some system alarm
occurs in such devices.
<3> A Communication may be
influenced by noise. Check the
ground wire and the shield of
the communication cables.
<4> The output of the I/O Link
devices is short-circuited.
<5> The power of the I/O Link
master and/or slave devices is
faulty.
Instantaneous power failure
Unstable power line
<6> Incomplete contact of the
communication cable
<7> Faulty wiring of the
communication cable
<8> Check the grounding of the
shield wire of the earth terminal
or the communication cable of
I/O devices.
<9> I/O Link devices are faulty.
<10>I/O Link master is faulty.
n=1,2: main board
n=3: CPU card
Contents
An I/O Link communication error
occurred.
n is a channel number (1 to 3).
yy, xx, ww and vv are
internal error code.
There are various causes as for
this error.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM194 (I/O Link i)

Alarm number
PC052 I/O Link I
PMC LSI RAM PARITY ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------MAIN BORAD
--------------------------------------------------PC053 I/O Link I
SLAVE LSI RAM PARITY ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : Unit name
(Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC054 I/O Link I
ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY
(Note)
---------------------------------------------------
Contents
Change the main board.

PMC LSI on the main board.
Change the I/O device of the unit.

yth unit (group x) of channel
n.
Check the power supply of the I/O

unit.
A power disconnection alarm

occurred in the yth unit (group
x) of channel n.
- 155 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
PC055 I/O Link I

I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)
CNC : MAIN BOARD
UNIT1 : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC055 I/O Link I
I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1) <->
UNITy(GROUPx)
UNITy 1 : Unit name (Note1)
UNITy : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I
I/O Link I DISCONNECTION
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)
CNC : MAIN BOARD
--------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I
I/O Link I DISCONNECTION
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1)<->
UNITy(GROUPx)
UNITy 1 : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC057 I/O Link I
SAFETY I/O ALARM
-----< ERROR POSITION >----UNITy : unit name (Note 1)
----------------------------------------PC058 I/O Link I
SLAVE LSI EXTERNAL ALARM
(Note1)
---------------------------------------------------
Check whether any noise is inserted

between the CNC and 1st unit.
Check the ground status of the
slave device and the contact of the
connection cable.
A communication error occurred

between the CNC and 1st unit
(group 0) of channel n.
Contents
Check whether there any noise is

inserted between the y-1th unit
(group x-1) and yth unit (group
x). Check the ground status of the
slave device and the contact of the
connection cable.
A communication error occurred

between the y-1th unit (group x1) and the yth unit (group x) of
channel n.
Check whether there is

disconnection or incomplete contact
for the cable between the CNC and
1st unit (group 0).
Connection error occurred

between the CNC and 1st unit
(group 0) of channel n.
Check whether there is

disconnection or incomplete contact
of the cable between the y-1th unit
(group x-1) and yth unit (group
x).
Connection error occurred

between the y-1th unit (group x1) and yth unit (group x) of
channel n.
Change the I/O device of the unit. If

the error still occurs, change the
main board.
A hardware failure of the safety

I/O occurred between the CNC
and the yth unit.
Change the I/O device of the unit.
A hardware failure occurred on

the yth unit (group x) of
channel n.
NOTE
1 When an unknown unit is connected, the hardware ID is displayed.
2 For some I/O devices, one unit such as a safety I/O unit may consist of two
groups. If a connection failure occurs between groups containing units of the
same type, PC058 instead of PC056 indicating a connection failure occurs as a
unit failure.
- 156 -
B-85314EN-1/01
15.3
Operation Errors
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screen
Message
INPUT INVALID
LADDER PROGRAM IS
PROTECTED BY PASSWORD
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME

Input a valid address or numeric
value.
Enter the password.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Input a existent subprogram number

or symbol.
Input a defined symbol or bit address.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND

THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND
THE FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT
ADDRESS
Specify a bit address for the write coil

search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION
BLOCK
The system cannot pick up all the

nets. Choose the nets to pick up, by
using the LADDER DIAGRAM
VIEWER display screen, and then
perform the net pickup operation
manually.
Disconnect the online communication
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the
ladder data.
Cancel the protection by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit
function block.
- 157 -
Contents
The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
The screen cannot be displayed
because the program is protected by
the password.
A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol is specified.
An undefined symbol character string
is specified.
The specified net is not found.
The specified address is not found.
The specified functional instruction is
not found.
You entered a byte address when
specifying an address used for the
write coil search.
The system failed to pick up all the
nets because there were 128 nets or
more to be picked up.
The ladder data cannot be displayed

because online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
another application is accessing the
ladder data.
This function is protected by the
You tried to edit the FB body
program.
B-85314EN-1/01

EDITOR screen
Message
THIS NET IS PROTECTED
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED

BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS
Reduce the range of data to copy.

Perform the copy operation several
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
Reduce the size of data to paste.
Make sure that the address types

match for the alteration operation.
Check the address to be input, and
then enter it correctly.
THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY
Enter a write-permitted address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE

MISMATCHED
Check the types of the address in

"OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter
the correct address or addresses.
Define symbol data in "OLD
ADDRESS".
function block.
Cut nets which do not include any
function block.
function block.
Copy nets which do not include any
function block.
function block.
Use NET EDITOR screen.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL

***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL
CANNOT CUT FUNCTION
BLOCK
CANNOT COPY FUNCTION

BLOCK
CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION

BLOCK
CANNOT INPUT AT THIS
SCREEN
CANNOT EDIT INPUT/OUTPUT
PARAM ADDRESS
- 158 -
Contents
When you are editing data on a persubprogram basis, you cannot edit
the subprogram frame nets (END1,
END2, END3, SP, and SPE).
The selected range of data exceeds
the size of the copy buffer.
An attempt was made to paste data

whose size exceeded the free space
of the sequence program.
An attempt was made to alter a bit
address to a byte address.
An attempt was made to alter a byte
address to a bit address.
A character string was entered that
was unacceptable as a PMC
address.
A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
Either "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
An attempt was made to alter a
write coil address to a writeprohibited bit address.
An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter
of a functional instruction to a writeprohibited bit address.
The type of the addresses in "OLD
ADDRESS" does not match that in
"NEW ADDRESS".
No symbol data is defined for "OLD
ADDRESS".
Symbol data is already defined for
"NEW ADDRESS".
You tried to cut the net including the
function block.
You tried to copy the net including the

function block.
You tried to edit the FB body

program.
You tried to set an address in the
output section that is omitted in the
function block.
An address in the input section of an
input/output parameter in the function
block cannot be changed.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Contents
When the input parameter of the
function block is plural data type, any
constant cannot be set.
NO CONSTANT TO
PARAMETER OF PLURAL
TYPE

EDITOR screen (when updating)
Message
OVERLAPPED COM
END IN COM
END1 IN COM
END2 IN COM
JMPE IN COM
SP/SPE IN COM
COME WITHOUT COM
COME NOT FOUND AFTER

COM
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER
(WARN)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER

If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
position. If COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
JMPE and corresponding JMP must
have same COM/COME status. Review
JMP range and COM range, to adjust
not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
remove it.
If COM is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COME is unnecessary,
remove it.
remove it.
If some of them are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of them are
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them
unique. (If two or more instructions with
same parameter number will never be
active simultaneously at one time, the
Ladder program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
If unnecessary, remove it. Assign
correct number not to exceed the
maximum number defined by each PMC
model.
- 159 -
Contents
There is no COME that corresponds
to this COM.
END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
between COM and COME.
JMPE is found between COM and
COME, and JMP and corresponding
JMPE have different COM/COME
status.
SP or SPE is found between COM

and COME.
There is no COM that corresponds to
this COME.
There is no COME that corresponds
to this COM.
Plural CTRs have the same number
as their parameter. (This is warning.)
CTR has parameter number that is

out of range.

Message
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD
NUMBER
(WARN)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER
NO END
NO END1
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END
GARBAGE AFTER END2
GARBAGE AFTER END3
OVERLAPPED JMP
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM

LEVEL
COME IN JMP
END IN JMP
END1 IN JMP
END2 IN JMP
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP
JMPB OVER COM BORDER
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents

each other.)
model.
Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in
proper position.
Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same

number as their parameter. (This is
warning.)
Remove extra END1, END2 or END3.
Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are

found.
Remove unnecessary nets, and move

necessary nets to proper position so
that they will be executed.
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the JMP is unnecessary,
remove it.
JMP and corresponding JMPE must
have same COM/COME status. Review
JMP range and COM range, to adjust
other completely.
COME and corresponding COM must
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review
COM range and JMP range, to adjust
other completely.
position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove
it.
There are some nets after END,

END2 or END3, which will not be
executed.
There is no JMPE that corresponds to
this JMP.

remove it.
JMPB and its destination must have
same COM/COME status. Review range
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
SP or SPE is found between JMP and

JMPE.
- 160 -
DIFU or DIFD has parameter number

that is out of range.
END, END1, END2 or END3 is not

found.
JMP and corresponding JMPE have

different COM/COME status.
COME is found between JMP and

JMPE, and COM and corresponding
COME have different JMP/JMPE
status.
END,END1,END2, or END3 is found

between JMP and JMPE.
JMPB and its destination differ in

COM/COME status.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
JMPB OVER LEVEL
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND

JMPC IN BAD LEVEL
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND
LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD

LEVEL
JMPC INTO COM
JMPE WITHOUT JMP
JMPE NOT FOUND AFTER

JMP
TOO MANY LBL
DUPLICATE LBL
OVERLAPPED SP
SPE WITHOUT SP
SPE NOT FOUND AFTER SP
END IN SP

JMPB can only jump to the same
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC is used to jump from a
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.
JMPC is used to jump from a
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL
of same L-address that the JMPC is
intended to jump exists in the
subprogram, assign different L-address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
LBL for JMPC must be located out of
any COM and COME pair. If the JMPC
is unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct
position. If the L-address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
If JMP is missing, add it in proper
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary,
remove it.
remove it.
Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
If some of these LBLs are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
If SPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.
If SP is missing, add it in proper
position. If the SPE is unnecessary,
remove it.
position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.
position. If END is in wrong place, move
it to proper position.
- 161 -
Contents
JMPB jumps to different program
level.
Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.

JMPC is used in other than
subprogram.
Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
JMPC jumps to LBL between COM

and COME.
There is no JMP that corresponds to

this JMPE.
There is no JMPE that corresponds to
this JMP.
There are too many LBLs.
Same L-address is used in plural

LBLs.
There is no SPE that corresponds to

this SP.
There is no SP that corresponds to
this SPE.
There is no SPE that corresponds to
this SP.
END is found between SP and SPE.

Message
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS
DUPLICATE TMRB/TMRBF
NUMBER
(WARN)
ILLEGAL TMRB/TMRBF
NUMBER
DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER

(WARN)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM
UNAVAILABLE
INSTRUCTION
SP IN BAD LEVEL
LADDER PROGRAM IS
BROKEN
NO WRITE COIL
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL

If some of these SPs are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
each other.)
model.
each other.)
model.
If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If
the subprogram is missing, create it.
Confirm that this ladder program is
correct one. If this program is correct
one, all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP can be used at top of a subprogram.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
This ladder program must be all cleared
once, and remake ladder program.
Add proper write coil.
CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2
or in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
- 162 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
Same P-address is used in plural
SPs.
Plural TMRBs/TMRBFs have the

same number as their parameter.
(This is warning.)
TMRB/TMRBF has parameter

number that is out of range.
Plural TMRs have the same number

as their parameter. (This is warning.)
TMR has parameter number that is

out of range.
Subprogram that is called by

CALL/CALLU is not found.
Unsupported instruction for this PMC
model is found.
SP is found in wrong place.
Ladder program may be broken by

some reason.
Write coil is necessary, but is not
found.
CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
SP IN LEVEL3
CS/CM/CE IN COM
CS/CM/CE IN BAD LEVEL
CM/CE WITHOUT CS
INSTRUCTION EXCEPT CM
IN CS
OVERLAPPED CS
FB BODY PROGRAM IS
BLOKEN

If END3 is located wrong, move it to
correct position. If the SP is
unnecessary, remove it.
remove it.
CS, CM or CE must be used in Level 2
or in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
If CS is missing, add it in proper
position. If the CM or CE is
unnecessary, remove it.
If CE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the instruction other than CM
is unnecessary, remove it.
If CE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the CS is unnecessary,
remove it.
The ladder program must be deleted
and remake it.
Contents
SP is found in level 3.
CS,CM or CE is found between COM

and COME.
CS,CM, or CE is used in wrong place.
There is no CS that corresponds to

this CM or CE.
Instruction except CM is found
between CS and CE.
There is no CE that corresponds to
this CS.
FB body program is broken.
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen
Message
ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION NAME
TOO MANY FUNCTION IN
ONE NET
TOO LARGE NET
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION
OPERATION AFTER
FUNCTION IS FORBIDDEN
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED
BAD COIL LOCATION
SHORT CIRCUIT
FUNCTION AFTER
DIVERGENCE IS
FORBIDDEN

Specify the name of an available
functional instruction.
Only one functional instruction is
allowed to constitute a net. If necessary,
divide the net into plural nets.
Divide the net into plural nets so that
step number in a net may become
small.
Coil without input, or coil connected to
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is not
necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
Output of functional instruction can not
be connected to a contact, nor to
conjunction with other signal that will be
implemented by logical-or operation.
Write coil is not found even if it is
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
Coil can be located only at rightmost
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
Find contact with terminals connected
by short circuit, and correct connections.
Functional instruction can not be used in
output section of net. If necessary,
divide the net into plural nets.
- 163 -
Contents
The entered name of functional
instruction is invalid.
Too many functional instructions are
in one net.
Net is too large. When a net is
converted into the object, the net
exceeds 256 steps.
No signal is provided for logical
operation.
No logical operation with functional

instruction output is permitted, except
write coils.
Write coil is expected, but not found.
Coil is located in bad position.
Some contacts are connected with

short circuit. CTR has a parameter
number that is out of the range.
Functional instruction is used in
output section of net.

Message
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME

INPUT
Left terminals of all coils in a net must

be connected to same input point.
BAD CONDITION INPUT
Check the connection of all condition

inputs of the functional instruction.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition inputs
interfere with each other.
Correct the connection where is not
connected.
Examine every connection, and find
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
Enter all of the relay addresses, and
parameters of functional instructions.
NO CONNECTION
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED
PARAMETER IS NOT
SUPPLIED
TOO LARGE DATA FOR NETEDITOR
TOO MANY FUNCTIONS FOR
NET-EDITOR
BAD DIAGRAM STRUCTURE
NOT SUPPORT ENHANCED

LADDER DIAGRAM
TOO COMPLICATED
CIRCUIT
AROUND FUNCTION
CONNECT OUTPUT TO COIL

DIRECTLY
Change for being to modify net by

[NEXT NET] soft key.
Change for being to modify net by
[NEXT NET] soft key.
Examine every connection, and find the
error of connection of relay or functional
instruction.
Replace other functional instruction
which supports Structure of extended
type net.
Or, change the ladder net construction
not to be Structure of extended type net.
The circuit lines branched from a
conditional input for some functional
instruction must reach the right power
line without joining the output line from
the functional instruction.
Refer to 8.3.4.3.
Connect the output of the functional
instruction directly to a coil.
SINGLE COIL IS EXPECTED
This functional instruction must have

single coil directly connected to the
output.
INVALID CIRCUIT FOR FB

PARAMETER
Specify the name of contact and coil for

the parameter of function block.
NO CONNECTION
PARAMETER IS NOT
SUPPLIED
Connect the broken connection.

Specify an address.
CAN NOT PLACE FB AND

FUNCTION IN ONE NET
NO ASSIGNMENT TO FB
CONTACT
Delete the functional instruction placed

on the same net as the function block.
Specify a contact.
- 164 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
When a net contains more than one
coil, the coils should not have any
contact beside them affects only of
the coils.
Some condition input of functional
instruction is not connected correctly.
The elements ,such as contacts and

coils, are not connected..
Net is too complicated to analyze.
Relay with blank address, or blank

parameter of functional instruction, is
found.
The net data in net editor screen is
too large.
There are too many functional
instructions in net editor screen.
Circuit is too complicated to analyze.
The ladder net Structure of extended

type net contains a functional
instruction which does not support
Structure of extended type net.
The circuit construction around
functional
instruction is too complicated.
The output of the functional

instruction is not
connected directly to a coil.
A functional instruction has multiple
coils
connected to its output which are
prohibited.
The functional instruction is
connected to the parameter of
function block.
The connection is broken.
The address is not assigned to the
input section and the coil of output
section of a function block.
A functional instruction is placed on
the same net as the function block.
The contact is not assigned in the
input section for a BOOL type of the
function block.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen
Message
TOO MANY
CHARACTERS
Make sure that the entered character

string is within the allowable input length.
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED
Disconnect the online communication with

FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
Cancel the protection by the programmer

protection function or 8-level protection
function.
Contents
The number of characters in the entered
character string exceeds the allowable
input length. Some of the characters are
discarded.
The title data cannot be displayed
another application is accessing the title
data.
programmer protection function or 8-level
protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen
Message
TOO MANY
CHARACTERS
Make sure that the entered address is

within the allowable input length.
ADDRESS IS
REQUIRED
Enter data in a batch correctly, as

instructed in "Editing a set of symbol and
comment data" in Subsection 9.2.2.
ILLEGAL PMC
ADDRESS
Enter an address correctly.
THE ADDRESS
ALREADY HAS AN
ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST
BE ENTERED
TOO LONG SYMBOL
NAME
TOO LONG COMMENT
STRING
THE STRING IS NOT
FOUND
OUT OF SPACE
Specify another address.
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
BAD SYMBOL NAME
Specify another symbol.

Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS
field.
Make sure that the symbol consists of 16
characters or less.
Make sure that the comment consists of 30
characters or less.
Specify another character string for the
search.
Create free space for the sequence
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder
or message data.
Disconnect the online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
symbol/comment data.
function.
Change the symbol name.
- 165 -
Contents
The number of characters in the entered
address exceeds the allowable address
input length.
No address was entered during the batch
input of address, symbol, and comment
data using the SYMBOL & COMMENT
EDITOR screen.
The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string
contains a space or spaces.
An already registered address was
entered.
An already registered symbol was
entered.
No PMC address was entered when new
symbol/comment data is registered.
The entered symbol exceeds the
specified number of characters.
The entered comment exceeds the
specified number of characters.
The search was done for the specified
character string but did not find it.
The symbol/comment editing area has no
free space.
The symbol/comment data cannot be
displayed because online communication
with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress
or another application is accessing the
symbol/comment data.
programmer protection function or 8-level
protection function.
The symbol name is invalid.

Message
CANNOT EDIT
ADDRESS AUTO
ASSIGNED SYMBOL
ILLEGAL DATA TYPE
ILLEGAL PROGRAM
NAME
LINE FEED IS NOT
AVAILABLE IN THIS
DATA
LINE FEED IS NOT
AVAILABLE IN THIS
MODE
NO SYMBOL.
PROGRAM SETTING IS
IGNORED
NOTHING TO PASTE
TOO LARGE DATA TO
PASTE
UNAVAILABLE
CHARACTERS WAS
OMITTED.

Use FANUC LADDER-III to change the
symbol.
B-85314EN-1/01
Enter a correct data type.

Enter a correct program name.
Contents
The symbol whose PMC address is
assigned automatically by compiling
FANUC LADDER-III, can not edit.
The specified data type is invalid.
The specified program is invalid.
Line feed code can be entered in comment

data only. Do not enter it in other data.
Line feed code cannot be entered in this

data.
Enter Line feed code in the insert or

overwrite mode.
Line feed code cannot be entered in this

mode.
Symbol name is required for local symbol.
The specified program is ignored

because no symbol is specified.
You need to copy or cut character strings

before you paste them.
Shorten the character string to copy or cut.
You try to paste character strings without

copying or cutting ones.
The character strings is too long to copy
or cut.
The characters which can not be used at
pasted position, were omitted.
Do not copy or cut characters which

cannot be used at pasted position.
Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR

screen
Message
INPUT INVALID
Correct the message number.

Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the
batch message input process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER
Enter a four-digit number as the message

number.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF

RANGE
Enter the number in the range from 0 to

4095 for the message number of the
format with path number, and 1000 to
9999 for the message number of other
format.
When entering kana or other Japanese
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
Enter a character string correctly between
a pair of @ signs.
Enter a character string correctly between
a pair of @ signs.
Enter a two-byte code correctly between
@02 and 01@.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT

FOUND
BAD NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS IN "@-@"
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN
"@-@"
BAD NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS FOR 2BYTE CODE
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE
CLOSING CONTROL
CODE "01" IS NOT
FOUND
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS
REPEATED
Enter a two-byte code correctly between

@02 and 01@.
Enter the closing control code.
Remove any repeated control code.
- 166 -
Contents
The format of the message number is
invalid, or the delimiter code semicolon (;) - was not entered in the
batch message input process.
The entered message number contains
any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
The entered message number is out of
range.
One of the @ sign pair is missing.
The number of characters entered

between the pair of @ signs is not even.
One or more invalid character codes
exist between the pair of @ signs.
The number of characters in the twobyte code (characters entered between
@02 and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@) contains one
or more characters other than the JIS
codes.
The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@) lacks the
closing control code (01).
The starting control code (02), closing
control code (01), and/or umlaut code
(0D) is repeated.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
CLOSING "]" IS NOT

FOUND
BAD NUMERICAL DATA
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR
NUMERIAL DATA
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED
Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes are

entered in pairs.
Specify the numerical data correctly.
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

function.
Enter an available address.

applications from accessing the message
data.
Contents
The delimiter codes for numerical data
are not entered in pairs.
The format of the numerical data is
invalid.
The address section of the numerical
data is invalid.
The message data cannot be displayed
another application is accessing the
message data.
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
Message
Contents
GROUP NUMBER IS TOO

LARGE
BASE NUMBER IS TOO
LARGE
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO
LARGE
Specify 15 or a smaller value as the

group number.
Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B (##,
#1 - #10).
Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
Specify 0 or a large value as the slot
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger
value.
Check the I/O unit name or address.
The entered group number is too large.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO

SMALL
I/O UNIT NAME

MISMATCH
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME
NOT ENOUGH SPACE
Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables

3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
Enter the data again after creating free
space by deleting the data allocated
behind the current cursor position or by
other adequate means.
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

applications from accessing the I/O
module data.
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

function.
- 167 -
The entered base number is too large.

The entered slot number is too large.
The entered slot number is too small.
The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y

address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
There is not enough free address space
for the size of the I/O unit you are going
to assign.
This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
The I/O module data cannot be
displayed because online
communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application
is accessing the I/O module data.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O CONFIGURATION EDITOR

screen
Message
TOO MANY GROUPS (CHx)
Delete any unnecessary group, then

create a new group.
TOO MANY SLOTS (CHx)
Delete any unnecessary slot, then

create a new slot.
TOO MANY SLOTS IN A

GROUP (CHx, Gyy)
Delete any unnecessary slot, then

create a new slot.
NO SLOT(Gxx)
SLOT NUMBER IS
REQUIRED
SLOT NUMBER DUPLICATE
Add a slot.
Enter a slot number.
CAN NOT DELETE MPG

SLOT
ILLEGAL SLOT NUMBER
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS
Turn the MPG flag off in the group

setting screen.
Enter a slot number not greater than
32.
Enter a correct PMC address again.
ILLEGAL SIZE
Enter a correct size again.
SLOT HAS NO ASSIGNMENT
Enter a PMC address and size.
ILLEGAL COMMENT
Enter a correct comment again.
PMC ADDRESS
OVERLAPPED (PMCm
X(Y)nnnn)
TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS
(CHx, Gyy)
Enter the PMC address or size so that

it is set only once.
TOO MANY INPUT POINTS

(CHx, Gyy)
Reduce the number of input points of

the group.
TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS

(CHx)
Reduce the number of output points in

the channel.
TOO MANY INPUT POINTS

(CHx)
Reduce the number of input points in

the channel.
TOO MANY CHARACTERS
Enter a comment within the input field.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT

FOUND
INPUT INVALID
Enter a correct numeric value.
Change the slot number used more

than once.
Reduce the number of output points of

the group.
- 168 -
Contents
A new group cannot be created
because the maximum number of
groups per channel is exceeded.
A new slot cannot be created because
the maximum number of slots per
channel (256 slots) is exceeded.
A new slot cannot be created because
the maximum number of slots per
channel (32 slots) is exceeded.
There is no slot in group Gxx.
No slot number is entered for a slot.
More than one slot data item having the
same slot number is found in the same
group.
No MPG slot can be deleted in the slot
setting screen.
The entered slot number is greater than
32.
The entered PMC address is invalid.
Alternatively, no PMC address is
entered.
The entered size is outside the PMC
address range.
Alternatively, a value of 0 is entered as
the size.
For a slot, a PMC address or size is not
entered for both DI and DO.
An entered comment does not conform
to the extended symbol and comment
format.
Address PMCm X(Y)nnnn is also
assigned to another slot in I/O Link i
assignment data.
The number of output points of the I/O
Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds
the upper limit (65 bytes by default or
29 bytes for the safety I/O device).
The number of input points of the I/O
Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds
the upper limit (65 bytes by default or
29 bytes for the safety I/O device).
Warning message. The number of I/O
Link i output points set in CHx exceeds
the upper limit.
Warning message. The number of I/O
Link i input points set in CHx exceeds
the upper limit.
The number of characters in an entered
comment exceeds the input width.
The specified address is not found.
A numeric value is invalid.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
I/O CONFIG DATA IS

BROKEN
TOO MANY SAFETY I/O
GROUPS
Enter an I/O configuration file again.
TOO MANY ASSIGNMENTS

(H.SPEED)(CHn,Gyy)
When a group in the high-speed

transfer cycle mode is connected to
I/O Link i, correct assignment so that
the assignment for each group is
performed within the quartered
transfer timing with referencing
Subsection 3.6.4 Transfer Cycle.
Correct the number of basic groups
for the I/O assignment selection
function of I/O Link i.(0 to 24)
Use addresses X0/Y0 and following.
BASIC GROUP INVALID
UNAVAILABLE ADDRESS
FOR DCSPMC
Reduce the number of I/O Link i

safety I/O groups.
THIS DATA IS BEING

MODIFIED

applications from accessing the I/O
configuration data.
INTERNAL
ERROR(0xCxxxxxxx)
Contact us, and report the displayed

message correctly.
Contents
I/O Link i assignment data is invalid.
Warning message. More than four I/O
Link i safety I/O groups are specified
either on the PMC or DCS side in the
entire system.
Warning message. In CHn, group yy
and following exceed the transfer
capacity limit in transfer timing
assignment processing when the highspeed mode of I/O Link i is used.
The number of basic groups for the I/O

assignment selection function of I/O
Link i is invalid.
Addresses X200/Y200, X400/Y400, or
X600/Y600 and following are assigned
to a group for which DCSPMC is
specified for the PMC path.
I/O configuration data cannot be
is accessing the I/O configuration data.
This error occurs due to an internal
factor. An error code is indicated in
parentheses.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen

Message
INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Contents
Enter a numerical value correctly, as

instructed in Section 9.8.
Enter a defined symbol or bit address.
The entered numerical value or its input

format is invalid.
was entered.
The system parameter data cannot be
is accessing the system parameter
data.
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

system parameter data.
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

Message
INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
Contents

instructed in "Screen operations using
other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.
The entered numerical value or its input

format is invalid.

- 169 -

was entered.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen

Message
INPUT INVALID
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY
STOP OR IN MDI MODE
PWE MUST BE ON
EITHER PWE OR KEY4 MUST
BE ON
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

instructed in Section 7.3.
Set a mode to MDI or emergency
stop.
Set the PWE to 1 in NC setting
screen.
screen or set the key KEY4 to 1.
Contents
The entered numerical value or its
input format is invalid.
The status of NC is not MDI mode or
emergency stop.
The PWE in NC setting screen
is 0.
The PWE in NC setting screen is 0
or the program protect key KEY4
is 0.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen

Message
TRACE FUNCTION IS
ALREADY IN USE
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER
ADDRESS
USB MEMORY IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION.
USB MEMORY IS NOT READY.
USB MEMORY IS FULL.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN
REMOVED
USB MEMORY IS NOT
FORMATTED
USB HARDWARE ERROR
(xxxxxxxxxx)
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
Contents
Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or

some other application finishes using
the trace function before executing it.
Specify a bit address as a sampling
address in the trace parameter.
Specify a bit address as the stop
trigger address in the trace
parameter.
Specify a bit address as the sampling
trigger address in the trace
parameter.
Terminate another function that is
using the USB memory, then perform
operation again.
Check whether a USB memory is
inserted.
Delete any unnecessary files and
allocate a required capacity.
Insert the USB memory, then execute
input/output operation again.
Replace the USB memory with
another one.
another one. If this error still occurs
after replacement, contact us, and
report the displayed message
correctly.
message correctly.
FANUC LADDER-III or some other

application is currently using the trace
function.
No sampling address is specified in
the trace parameter.
The stop trigger address is not
specified in the trace parameter.
- 170 -
The sampling trigger address is not

specified in the trace parameter.
The USB memory is being used by
another function.
No USB memory is inserted.
The USB memory is full.
A USB memory is removed while it is
being accessed.
The inserted USB memory cannot be
recognized.
This error occurs due to a USB
hardware failure. An error code is
indicated in parentheses.

parentheses.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen

Message
INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED
INVALID STOP TRIGGER
ADDRESS
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER
ADDRESS
UNSUPPORTED TRACE
SETTING FILE
INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE
n)
SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS
ADJUSTED
UNKNOWN SETTING WAS
SKIPPED(LINE n)
INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS
WAS FOUND
TOO MANY SAMPLING
ADDRESSES

Enter a numerical value that is within
the specified data range of the
relevant trace parameter.
Specify a bit address as the stop or
sampling trigger address.
Enter a PMC signal address that can
be used as the stop trigger address.
Enter a PMC signal address that can
be used as the sampling trigger
address.
This file cannot be handled. Set data
in the TRACE SETING screen.
Output the trance setting file again.
Alternatively, set data in the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the data on the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the read trace data.
THE FILE IS NOT TRACE

SETTING FILE
FILE NAME CONTAINS
RESERVED WORD.
OTHER FUNCTION.
This file cannot be read. Specify a

correct file.
Correct file name.

inserted.
another one.
Correct the file name.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN

REMOVED
USB MEMORY IS NOT
FORMATTED
FILE NAME IS INVALID.
FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE
SPECIFIED.
USB HARDWARE ERROR
(xxxxxxxxxx)

operation again.
A folder name is specified. Specify an

appropriate file name.
after replacement, contact the
FANUC service center, and report the
displayed message correctly.
message correctly.
- 171 -
Contents
A nonnumeric value or an out-ofrange parameter value was entered.
was entered.
A byte address was specified as the
stop or sampling trigger address.
The bit address entered as the stop
trigger address is invalid.
The bit address entered as the
sampling trigger address is invalid.
Unsupported trace setting file was
read.
An invalid setting was found.
The file may be broken.
The values were adjusted according
to the read data. (This is warning.)
An unknown trace setting item was
found and ignored. (This is warning.)
An invalid sampling address was
found. (This is warning.)
The number of sampling addresses
exceeds the upper limit. (This is
warning.)
An attempt was made to read a file
which was not a trace setting file.
FORFANUC cannot be used in the
top of the file name.
another function.
Another function is formatting the
USB memory.
A USB memory is removed while it is
being accessed.
The inserted USB memory cannot be
recognized.
An invalid character was found in a
file name.
An attempt was made to read or write
a folder.

parentheses.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O Diagnosis screen

Message
ENTER STRING TO SEARCH.
I/O DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IS NOT
SUPPORTED
INPUT INVALID
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN
NO GROUP FORMAT.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED.

Enter a string before starting a
search.
To use the I/O diagnosis function,
update the PMC system software.
Check the entered string.
Check the information displayed on
the PMC alarm screen and reload
the program.
Use [GROUP] on the I/O diagnosis
(setting) screen.
Retry after completing the function
that is using the program.
REACHED TO THE END OF

SYMBOL DATA.
To make another search, specify a

string again.
SYMBOL ORDER IS NOT

AVAILABLE.
THE GROUP IS NOT FOUND

FORCING IS PROTECTED ON
THIS PATH.
Use the FANUC LADDER-III to

convert the program to one with the
extended symbol & comment
function.
Check the specified group.
Disable the programmer protection
function.
THE STRING IS NOT FOUND
Check the specified string.
15.4
Contents
No search string is specified.
The I/O diagnosis function cannot
be used because the PMC system
software is an older version.
The entered string is invalid.
The program is broken.
No group display is set.

The program cannot be referenced
because it is being used by another
function.
The search has been completed
until the end of the data has been
reached.
The format of this program does not
allow sorting and display in symbol
order.
The specified group is not found.
The forced input/output function is
currently protected on the selected
PMC path.
The specified string is not found.
I/O Communication Error Messages
The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below.
Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation

Message
MEMORY CARD IS NOT

READY
MEMORYCARD IS FULL
Check whether a memory card is

installed.
Delete files to create available space.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE
PROTECTED
MEMORYCARD IS NOT
FORMATTED
TOO MANY FILES IN
MEMORYCARD
FILE NOT FOUND
Release the write protection of the

memory card.
Format the memory card.
FILE IS READ-ONLY
FILE NAME IS INVALID
COULD NOT FORMAT
MEMORY CARD
UNSUPPORTED
MEMORYCARD
CAN NOT DELETE FILE
Delete unnecessary files to reduce the

number of files.
On the list screen, check the file name
or file number.
Check the attributes of the file.
Specify the file name in MS-DOS form.
The NC cannot format this memory
card. Use another unit such as a
personal computer to format the
memory card.
Replace the memory card with another
one.
Check the attributes of the file.
- 172 -
Contents
No memory card is installed.
There is no available space in the
memory card.
The memory card is write-protected.
The memory card cannot be
recognized.
There are too many files.
The specified file cannot be found.
Write to the specified file is not
permitted.
The file name is illegal.
formatted.
This memory card is not supported.

An error occurred when a file was
deleted from the memory card.
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Contents
MEMORYCARD BATTERY
ALARM
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS
ERROR
DIFFERENCE FOUND
Replace the battery of the memory

card.
Change the file name to another one.
The battery of the memory card has

become weak.
The file name is already used.
Replace the memory card with another

one.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY

OTHER FUNCTION
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT
SELECTED
Wait until the PMC user completes

processing, then retry.
This file cannot be read. Check the
type of the file.
If the file does not exist, the key entry is
invalid. If this error occurs even when
the cursor is placed at a file name,
contact the FANUC service center.
Check the total number of files on the
list screen.

accessed.
File comparison detected a
mismatch.
Another PMC user is using the
memory card.
An attempt was made to read a file,
but its ROM data ID was illegal.
The file number cannot be selected.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT

EXIST
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED
TO "128"
MEMORY CARD IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
MEMORY CARD IS WRITE
PROTECTED
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY
CARD
COULD NOT DELETE FILE
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER
UNSUPPORTED TRACE
SETTING FILE
INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE
n)
SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS
ADJUSTED
UNKNOWN SETTING WAS
SKIPPED(LINE n)
INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS
WAS FOUND
TOO MANY SAMPLING
ADDRESSES
Enter a numeric value not exceeding

128.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently using the
memory card.
Cancel the write protection of the
memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
Use another memory card.
Check the read/write permission
attribute of the file.
Delete unnecessary old trace result file
or files.
This file is Invalid. Set data in the

TRACE SETING screen.
Output the trance setting file again.
Alternatively, set data in the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the data on trace setting screen.

message correctly.
- 173 -
The entered file number is not

present. The entered number
exceeds the total number of files.
A value up to 128 can be entered as
the file number.
Some other function is currently
using the memory card.
The memory card is write protected.
This is an unsupported type of

memory card.
The file cannot be deleted.
No more trace result file can be
created because the maximum trace
result file number (file extension)
has been reached.
Unsupported trace setting file was
read.
Invalid setting value was found.
The file may be broken.
It was adjusted according to the
contents. (This is warning.)
An unknown trace setting item was
found and ignored. (This is warning.)
An invalid sampling address was
found. (This is warning.)
The number of sampling addresses
exceeds the upper limit. (This is
warning.)
An error due to an internal factor
occurred. Details on the error are
displayed in parentheses.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages displayed during USB memory I/O operation

Message
FILE NAME CONTAINS
RESERVED WORD.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN
REMOVED
OTHER FUNCTION.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY
USED. OVERWRITE IT?
FILE NOT FOUND
USB MEMORY IS FULL.
FILE IS READ-ONLY.
USB MEMORY IS NOT

FORMATTED
FILE NAME IS INVALID.

Correct file name.
inserted.
operation again.
Follow the message, and overwrite
the file or specify another file name to
write data.
Check the file name or number on the
file list screen.
Delete any unnecessary files and
allocate a required capacity.
Specify another file or check the file
attribute and delete the read-only
attribute.
another one.
Correct the file name.
DIFFERENCE FOUND
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT
EXIST
Check the total number of files on the

list screen.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED

TO "128"
Enter a numeric value not greater

than 128.
FOLDER CANNOT BE
SPECIFIED.
<1> The specified number indicates a

folder. Enter an appropriate
number.
<2> No folder can be selected in the
file list screen.
<1> The file name corresponding to
the specified file number consists of
more than 32 characters. Enter an
appropriate number.
<2> No file having a file name
consisting of more than 32
characters can be selected in the
file list screen.
after replacement, contact us, and
report the displayed message
correctly.
message correctly.
THIS FILE CANNOT BE

SPECIFIED.
USB HARDWARE ERROR

(xxxxxxxxxx)
- 174 -
Contents
The string FORFANUC cannot be
used in the top of the file name.
A USB memory is removed while it
is being accessed.
another function.
An existing file name is specified as
the write destination.
The specified file was not found.
The USB memory is full.
The specified file is read-only.
The inserted USB memory cannot

be recognized.
An invalid character was found in a
file name.
File comparison detected a
mismatch.
The entered file number is not
found. The entered number is
greater than the total number of
files.
A value up to 128 can be entered as
the file number.
<1> The specified number indicates
a folder.
<2> An attempt was made to select
a folder in the file list screen.
<1> The file name corresponding to
the specified file number consists
of more than 32 characters.
<2> An attempt was made to select
a file having a file name consisting
of more than 32 characters.


parentheses.
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation

Message
NOT IN EMG STOP MODE
INVALID SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
DIFFERENCE FOUND
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL
FLASH ROM IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION

Place the system in the emergency
stop state.
Check the program.
Wait until the PMC user completes

processing, then retry.
This file cannot be read. Check the
type of the file.
Retry after ending another function
that uses flash ROM.
message correctly.
Contents
The system is not in the emergency
stop state.
The transfer program is illegal.
A file comparison detected a
mismatch.
Another PMC user is using the flash
ROM.
An attempt was made to read a file,
but its ROM data ID was illegal.
Flash ROM is in use by another
function.
An error due to an internal factor
occurred. Details on the error are
displayed in parentheses.
Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O

operation.
Message
ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER
FORMAT
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER

IS REQUIRED
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED

OR IN ERROR STATUS
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK

THE COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS
RECEIVED DATA HAS
OVERRUN
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING
THIS CHANNEL
BAD COMMUNICATION
PARAMETER
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING
I/O FUNCTION

Specify a file of the PMC parameter
format. Also, check the specified file
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
Specify a file of the handy file format.
Also, check the specified file to see
whether its content is not disrupted.
Specify file of recognizable format
such as PMC parameter format, or
check the contents of the file.
Specify file name or file number for
the operation.
Check the communication parameters
such as baud rate, and retry to
communicate.
Check the power of I/O device is ON.
Check the I/O device is connected.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O
device, solve it.
Check the PMC's communication
parameters such as baud rate match
the ones of I/O device.
about flow control.
Use the other channel, or stop the
function.
such as baud rate.
Wait until function that using I/O
function do finish, or stop the function.
- 175 -
Contents
The specified file is not of the PMC
parameter format.
The specified file is not of the handy

file format.
Cannot recognize the format of
specified file.
Need file name or file number to
identify file to read, compare, or
delete.
Communication with the I/O device
has been timeout.
Any I/O device is not connected, or
some error has occurred in it.
Invalid data has been received.
Too many data have received at

once.
Others function is using this channel.
Setting parameters of communication
are not correct.
Another function such as FANUC
LADDER-III is using I/O function.

Message
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE

FORMAT DATA
Check the file.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING

ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE
SETTING
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION
Set a valid baud rate.

Set a valid channel number.
Set a valid parity bit.
Set a valid stop bit.
Set a valid output code.
Wait until On-line function, do finish
the using I/O function. In general,
both of I/O function and On-line
function should not be used at the
same time.
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents
The received data is not a program of
the PMC system or is a program of
some other incompatible type.
The set baud rate is invalid.
The set channel number is invalid.
The set parity bit is invalid.
The set stop bit is invalid.
The set output code is invalid.
Can not input/output of sequence
program, because On-line function is
using sequence program.
Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during

the I/O operations
Message
ERROR OCCURS IN
SEQUENCE PROGRAM
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY
STOP
PWE MUST BE ON
MUST BE IN EDIT MODE
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT
ALLOWED
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED
BY OTHER FUNCTION
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
PMC PARAMETER IS
PROTECTED BY OTHER
FUNCTION
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH
TOO LARGE SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION
INVALID I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA

Check the PMC alarm screen and
correct the indicated program error
accordingly.
Check the file.
Set to emergency stop.
screen.
Set to the EDIT mode.
Check the related settings.
PMC parameter.
specified device.
PMC parameter.
Specify a program of a valid type.
Check the file. Or, change to a step
number option that allows you to set a
function that is currently displaying
the ladder program.
Read correct I/O configuration file.
- 176 -
Contents
Data cannot be output because there
is an error in the ladder program.
The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
The status of NC is not emergency
stop when reading PMC parameter.
The PWE in NC setting screen is 0
when reading PMC parameter.
The mode is not EDIT when reading
PMC parameter.
There are not all the settings that are
needed to use this function.
The PMC parameter is currently used
by some other function and cannot be
referenced by this function.
The specified device is currently used
used by this function.
The PMC parameter is currently used
changed by this function.
The specified program is of a different
type and cannot be read.
The ladder program is too large to
read.
The ladder program is currently used
referenced by this function.
Invalid I/O configuration data was
read and any of the following
operations was performed:
- Writing it to the memory card
- Comparing it with a memory card file
USB
- Writing it to flash ROM
-Comparing it with flash ROM
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
TOO LARGE I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION

Check the I/O configuration file.
using the I/O configuration data, then
execute operation again.
- 177 -
Contents
The I/O configuration file is too large
to read.
I/O configuration data is being used
by another function (such as FANUC
LADDER-III).
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING

WITH FANUC LADDER-III
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC

LADDER-III
On the personal computer, custom PMC editing can be performed using the programming system for
sequence program development FANUC LADDER-III.
For the method of operating FANUC LADDER-III, refer to the following manual:
FANUC LADDER-III Operators Manual (B-66234EN)
Use the procedure below when performing custom PMC editing with FANUC LADDER-III.
(1) Backup of a ladder program
From the ROBODRILL, back up a ladder program (PMC2) to be edited.
(2) File conversion/decompilation (MEM file LAD file)
Convert the backed-up ladder program to a file that can be edited using FANUC LADDER-III.
(3) Editing
Edit the ladder program, message data, and so forth.
(4) Compilation/file conversion (LAD file MEM file)
Compile the edited ladder program and convert it to a file that can be loaded into the ROBODRILL.
(5) Loading of the ladder program
Load the ladder program to the ROBODRILL by using a memory card or Handy File.
(When using the multi-language display function, see Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION".)
CAUTION
FANUC LADDER-III ver. 6.30 or later is required.
To edit custom PMC for the ROBODRILL using FANUC LADDER-III, set
"exparam" in the %%%FLSET file in the folder in which FANUC LADDER-III has
been installed to "1".
[%%%FLSET file]
;=================================================
;
FANUC LADDER-III Initial Setting File
;
( `key word =' <= 9 characters )
;=================================================
;
*V; ====== System information ======
;
exparam = 1; Set "1"

;
*M; === Mnemonic options definition ===
- 181 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
On the system parameter setting screen of FANUC LADDER-III, confirm that "2 Channel" is checked in
"Selectable I/O Link Assignment".
A.1
CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE
(1) Back up the ladder program of the ROBODRILL from the machine. (See Chapter 11.)
(2) Copy the backed up ladder program onto the hard disk of the personal computer.
(Example: Copy the ladder program into the C:\PMC folder.)
(3) Activate FANUC LADDER-III.
- 182 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

(4) Select [File] [Open].

The Open File window appears.
Set [Files of type] to [All Files (*.*)].
Select the backed up ladder program.
Click the [Open] button.
The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.
(5) Enter the name of a ladder program to be created. (Example: PMC2.LAD)

Select 31i-B PMC for [PMC Type].
Upon completion of setting, click the [OK] button.
- 183 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(6) The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.
(7) The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.
(8) Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion of decompilation, the decompilation window is
automatically closed to display the screen below. (Ignore warning W-4105.)
- 184 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A.2

LADDER PROGRAM EDITING
For the method of operation, refer to "FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)."
Notes and tips on editing are provided below.
A.2.1
Title Editing
The items "Program Designed By", "ROM Written By", and "Remarks" may be used freely.
Do not edit the other items.
(The screen below provides an example of data set by FANUC at the time of shipment.)
- 185 -

A.2.2
APPENDIX
Ladder Editing
Create a ladder program by using P1500 (CUSTOM) as the main program.

Subprograms may be added freely. (P1501 to P5000 may be used.)
- 186 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B-85314EN-1/01
A.2.3
APPENDIX

Symbol and Comment Editing
Symbols and comments can be freely added to any addresses.

(On the PMC2 ladder editing/reference screen and signal status screen, set symbols and comments
are displayed. However, on the screens common to PMC1 and PMC2 such as the parameter screen,
symbols and comments of PMC1 are used.)
- 187 -

A.2.4
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Message Editing
Do not add messages to addresses other than the specified addresses (A100.0 to A149.7).
The table below indicates the usable alarms and operator messages.
Alarm
Operator message
1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099
[When the multi-language display function is not used]
Messages set here are displayed without modification. When switching the display language, see
Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".
[When the multi-language display function is used]
See Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION".
- 188 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A.2.5
I/O Module Editing
When the standard settings are used, no modification is needed.

Before making additions or modifications to addresses for CH2 (X200-X327/Y200-Y327), fully
understand the specifications to assign the addresses correctly.
I/O Link i has been adopted as an I/O link. When you change the settings, refer to Section 9.10,
"DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT " in "PMC Programming Manual (B64513EN)" or Chapter 15, "CREATION OF I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT DATA" in "FANUC
LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)".
A.2.6

System Parameter Editing
You need not edit system parameters usually.

For the method of switching the comment display according to the display language when a ladder
diagram is displayed on the machine screen, see Appendix C, "CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM
COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE".
- 189 -

A.3
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE

CREATION
(1) Select [Tool] [Compile].

The Compile window appears. Select the [Option1-2] tab.
Check the items below as needed then click the [Exec] button:
Output Symbol/Comment
Output First Comment to Output Fourth Comment
Output Netcomment pointers
Multiple use check of Function parameter number
Multiple use check of the symbol address
Output warning in detail
- 190 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

(2) Check that the error count is 0, then click the [Close] button.
(3) Select [File] [Export].

The Export window appears.
Select the file type according to the installation mode of the ladder program.
For a memory card:
[Memory-card Format File]
For a Handy File:
[Handy-file Format File]
After selecting the file type, click the [Next >] button.
- 191 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(4) Specify the file name of the ladder program to be installed.
After specifying the file name, click the [Finish] button.

(5) When data conversion is complete, the following message appears. Click the [OK] button.
(6) Copy the loading file onto a floppy disk or memory card, then install the file on the ROBODRILL.
(See Chapter 11.)
- 192 -
B-85314EN-1/01
A.4
APPENDIX

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION
When creating a custom ladder program with this series by using a custom ladder program created in the
past, note the following:
This series differs in the PMC configuration. So, ladder programs created with the old model must
not be installed without modification.
Even a ladder program created according to the PMC configuration of the new series may not
operate normally when newly added interface signals are used, if the system ladder program version
is earlier. Check whether the interface signals used are usable.
The system ladder program number/version information can be checked on the following
screens:
PMC:
Title data screen
NC: System configuration screen
When a custom ladder program that was created with the old model and has a different program
number/version is to be used with this system, extract only necessary portions to create a new second
PMC ladder program.
An example of procedure for creating a custom ladder program usable with this system by using FANUC
LADDER-III (Version 6.30) from a custom ladder program created with an old ROBODRILL model is
described below.
- 193 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(1) Open a ladder program created in the past.

Select [File] [Open File].
Select a saved LAD file or MEM file.

When an LAD file is selected, the program list display window is opened. (Proceed to (2).)
When a MEM file is selected, the message below is displayed. Click [OK].
- 194 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

A window for creating a new ladder program is displayed. Enter a desired program name then click
[OK].
The message below is displayed. Click [OK].
Click [OK] without entering the password.
Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically

closed. (Ignore warning W-4105 if output.)
- 195 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.
(3) Open a new ladder program to be created. (At the same time, start another FANUC LADDER-III.)
By using the same procedure as described in (1), open a MEM format ladder program backed up
from the machine of this series.
- 196 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

Enter the program name and specify "31i-B PMC" in PMC Type then click [OK].
The message below is displayed. Click [OK].
The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.
- 197 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically

closed.
The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.
- 198 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

(4) Copy the ladder program.

Open subprogram P1500 of the custom ladder program created previously and select the portion
between SUB71 and SUB72 (not including SUB71 and SUB72) then select [Edit] [Copy].
(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Copy].)
- 199 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Open P1500 of the ladder program to be created newly then move the cursor to the net of SUB72.
- 200 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

Select [Edit] [Paste].

(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Paste].)
This completes the copying of the ladder program.

The symbols and comments used in the ladder program are also copied.
(5) Connecting messages
See Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".
(6) Connecting symbols and comments
If necessary symbols and comments are not copied together with the ladder program, create a
mnemonic file containing the symbols and comments from the custom ladder program created
previously.
- 201 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Select [Tool] [Mnemonic Conversion].

Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Symbol&Comment), and Selection Item (Full
Options) then click [OK].
Open a mnemonic file containing the created symbols and comments with a text editor and leave
only those symbols and comments that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file.
(Delete those unnecessary symbols and comments that are used with the system.)
- 202 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.

Select [Tool] [Source Program Conversion].
When only necessary symbols and comments are to be added, "Initialize the following data before
conversion" need not be checked.
(When initializing symbol and comment data, uncheck "Ladder".)
(7) Convert X and Y addresses.
The X and Y addresses may have been changed with each series.
Convert the X and Y addresses to addresses usable with this series according to Chapter 5,
"INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS".
To use the address replacement function, move the cursor to an address to be replaced then select
[Edit] [Replace]. The window below is displayed. Enter an address before replacement in
"Search string" and set an address after replacement in "Replace string" then click [Replace].
- 203 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
If addresses to be replaced are contiguous, select [Edit] [Multi-replace...]. The window below is
displayed. Set the start address of addresses before replacement and the start address of addresses
after replacement with [New Data] then click [Exec]. Those addresses are replaced in a batch.
- 204 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A.5

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES
When the PMC message multi-language display function is not used, edit messages on the message
editing screen only.
Create messages according to the descriptions below.
A.5.1
Ladder Program Message Editing
Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.
The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message
numbers, and A addresses.
Alarm
Operator message
A address
1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099
A100.0 to A149.7
- 205 -

APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Add necessary messages.
To switch the message display language without using the multi-language display function, switch the
message by using a ladder program and the interface signals described in Section 12.23. An example of
program is provided below.
To switch the message by using this method, the power must be turned off then back on after
switching the display language.
- 206 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX

To use messages created previously, open the ladder program previously created then select [Tool]
[Mnemonic Conversion].
Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Message), and Selection Item (Full Options) then click
[OK].
Open a mnemonic file containing the created messages with a text editor and leave only those messages
that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file. (Delete those unnecessary messages that
are used with the system.)
- 207 -

APPENDIX
Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.

Select [Tool] [Source Program Conversion].
Set the mnemonic file name then click [OK] to incorporate the message data.
- 208 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
B.1
OVERVIEW
This function can forcibly enter a value for the signal of an arbitrary PMC address. With this function, for
example, an X value can be forcibly entered to enable sequence program debugging without using a
machine, and a Y value can be forcibly entered to enable the signal wiring on the machine to be checked
efficiently without using a sequence program.
There are the following two input modes: Forced input/output mode and override mode. Use either of
these modes according to your purpose. This function is added to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
(1) Forced input/output mode
This mode is applied to all PMC addresses.
However, signals changed by the forced input/output are overwritten when values written or input
by a sequence program are scanned, and therefore the changes made by the forced input/output are
lost.
Machine
I/O addresses
X,Y
Overwrite
Overwrite
Ladder
program
G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E
Overwrite
Example 1:
When forced input/output is applied to R0 in the following ladder program
X0.0
MOVE
1111
1111
K0
R0
(a) The initial signal status is as follows:

X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H
(b) A value of FFH is forcibly input to R0.
X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH
(c) When X0.0 is turned on, R0 indicates the result of input from the sequence program.
X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H
- 209 -
FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Example 2:
When forced input is applied to X0 in a configuration where I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected
to X0 over an I/O Link
The input value from I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0 at certain intervals. So, even if
the value of X0 is forcibly modified, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle. Thus, the value of
X0 is restored to the value input from I/O Unit-MODEL A.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.
X0 = 00h
3.Input from the machine in the next cycle
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
The forcibly modified value is

overwritten with the input from the
machine.
X0 = FFh
Cyclical transfer may also be performed for addresses that are not assigned. So, use the
forced input/output function for X in the forced input/output mode to debug a sequence
program when no I/O device is connected or assigned.
When an I/O device is connected, use the override function described below to debug a
sequence program.
- 210 -
FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) OVERRIDE mode

The state in which values modified by the forced input/output function cannot be overwritten by a
sequence program or machine signals is referred to as override. In the override mode, override can
be set for any X and Y signals. Forced input/output is applied to those X and Y addresses where
override is not set, and also to addresses other than X and Y.
Example:
In this example, the forced input/output function is applied to X0 in a configuration where the
I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to X0 with an I/O link.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
2. Override is set for X0.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
The value transferred from I/O

Unit-MODEL A is invalidated.
X0 = FFh
3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
X0 = FFh
NC
X0 = 00h
Thus, the forced input function can be used for X addresses in the override mode to debug a
sequence program while an I/O device is connected. When a Y address is placed in the
override state, a value that has been forcibly modified by forced input/output is output to the
I/O device.
- 211 -
FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
CAUTION
1. In OVERRIDE mode, input/output signals are updated at 8-ms intervals in sync
with the ladder level. When an I/O link is used which is usually updated at 2-ms
intervals, an input/output signal timing delay occurs. For this reason, note that a
sequence that depends on input/output signal timing may perform an
unpredictable operation.
2. Note that, when OVERRIDE mode is set, the interval of the second level may be
extended slightly.
3. Even if override is set for a Y address, the resultant value of a ladder operation
before modified by forced input/output is displayed as the coil on/off value in
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. A value after modified by the forced
input/output function is output to the I/O device. Note that the on/off indication
on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen does not match a value output to
the I/O device.
Example:
In this example, the forced input/output function is used for Y0.0 in the ladder
below in a onfiguration where the I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to Y0 with
an I/O link. Before OVERRIDE setting, the on/off indication in dynamic display
matches a value output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown below
I/O Unit-MODEL A
X0.0
Y0.0
(off)
(off)
NC
Y0.0=off
(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)
If 1 is entered forcibly after setting OVERRIDE for Y0.0, the value modified by
the forced input/output function is output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown
below.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
X0.0
Y0.0
(off)
(off)
NC
Y0.0=on
(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)
WARNING
Special care must be exercised when a signal with the forced input/output
function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation of
the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when persons are
near the machine.
- 212 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B.2
APPENDIX
FUNCTION
SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED

INPUT/OUTPUT
Use the procedures below to set the input/output modes.

(1) Operation for enabling FORCING mode
Use the procedure below.
(a) Turn on the power.
(b) Press the emergency stop button.
(2) Operation for enabling OVERRIDE mode
Use the procedure below.
(a) Turn on the power.
(b) Press the emergency stop button.
(c) Set bit 0 of K906 (keep relay) to 1.
(d) Turn the power off and on again while holding down the emergency stop button.
WARNING
Special care must be exercised when modifying a signal with the forced
input/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the
operation of the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when
persons are near the machine.
CAUTION
1 Upon completion of forced input/output operations, reset keep relay K906#0 to 0.
2 Turning on the power with the emergency stop button released resets keep relay
K906#0 to 0. (The OVERRIDE mode is disabled.)
3 The setting of OVERRIDE is not maintained when the power is turned off. When
the power is turned on again, the setting of OVERRIDE is cleared for X and Y
addresses.
4 Do not force input/output operations for any signal other than those (except the F
address) usable with the custom PMC function.
Never force input/output operations especially for X8.4 (emergency stop) or Y6.1
(Z-axis brake control).
- 213 -
FUNCTION
B.3
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
SCREEN DISPLAY
On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the value of a desired signal can forcibly be modified.
On this screen, the following two input modes are available: Forced input/output and override. To
move to the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, click soft key [FORCED I/O] on the SIGNAL STATUS
screen. The following operations can be performed on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen:
*1
Search for a signal: [SEARCH]

Switch to the decimal display and input mode: [DEC]
Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode: [HEX]
Display the SIGNAL STATUS screen: [EXIT]
Turn the signal on: [ON]
Turn the signal off: [OFF]
Set override: [OVRIDE SET] (*1)
Clear override for a signal: [OVRIDE RESET] (*1)
Clear override for all signals: [INIT] (*1)
This soft key is enabled in override mode.
Input mode
Signal status display area
Additional information line
Key input line
Message display line
In the input mode section at the right of the title, "OVERRIDE" is displayed as the mode of the forced
input/output function only in the override mode.
In the signal status display area, the signal status of each address is displayed. For X and Y signals, the
status of each bit for which override is set is displayed as follows.
(1) For an X signal
(Input signal from the I/O device) (Input signal to the ladder program)
In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the input
signals to the ladder program on the right is displayed.
- 214 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
FUNCTION
(2) For a Y signal

(Output signal from the ladder program) (Output signal to the I/O device)
In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the output
signals from the ladder program on the left is displayed.
On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error message is displayed when
required.
B.4
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND

MODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS
Soft keys on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen

Force input/output
Searches for an address.
Turns the signal on.

Turns the signal off.
Switches to the decimal

input mode.
Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.
Override
Clears override for a signal.
Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
Turns the signal on.
Searches for an address.
Switches to the
decimal input mode.
Turns the signal off.
Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.
- 215 -
Sets override.
Clears override for all

signals.
FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Operations using soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte or bit address.
(2) [DECIMAL] Switch to the decimal input mode
Switches the contents of the byte to the decimal display and input mode.
This soft key is enabled only when the hexadecimal display and input mode is set.
(3) [HEX] Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode
Switches the contents of the byte to the hexadecimal display and input mode.
This soft key is enabled only when the decimal display and input mode is set.
(4) [EXIT] Switch to the SIGNAL STATUS screen
Terminates the forced input/output function.
(5) [ON] Turn the signal on
Places the signal at the cursor in the on state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending
on the cursor position.
(6) [OFF] Turn the signal off
Places the signal at the cursor in the off state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending
on the cursor position.
(7) [OVRSET] Set override
Places the X or Y address at the cursor in the override state. Operation in bit or byte units is
available depending on the cursor position.
This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.
(8) [OVRRST] Clear override for a signal
Clears the override state of the X or Y address at the cursor. Operation in bit or byte units is
available depending on the cursor position.
(9) Clear override for all signals
Clears the override state of all X and Y addresses.
- 216 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
FUNCTION
Screen operations using other keys

(1) INPUT key
Use this key to modify the status of a signal or signals.
(a) Setting in bit units
Enter 1, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the on state.
Enter 0, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the off state.
Just press the INPUT key to invert the on/off state of the signal.
(b) Setting in byte units
At the byte cursor, enter a binary number consisting of up to 8 digits, then press the INPUT key.
(If an entered number is shorter than 8 digits, the number is entered starting from bit 0.)
Example:
When 100 is entered, the number is entered as follows:
Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is on a HEX or DECIMAL field, hexadecimal or decimal input in byte units is
available.
(c) Continuous data input
Continuous data can be entered vertically. The cursor moves at the end of continuously
entered data.
Use a semicolon (;, EOB) as the data delimiter.

Example: "1;0;1" + INPUT key
Use ;= to enter the same value as for the previous data.

Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + INPUT key: 1,1,1,0,0
Use ;; to skip an address.

Example: "1;;1" + INPUT key: Nothing is entered in the second item.
Use "R;input-value;count" to enter the same input value as many times as the specified
number.
Example: "R;1;200" + INPUT key: A value of 1 is entered in the vertical 200 fields.
(2) Cursor keys
Use the cursor keys to select a signal whose value is to be modified.
Pressing the cursor left key when the cursor is at bit 7 of an address changes the cursor to the byte
cursor.
Pressing the cursor right key when the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field of an address
changes the cursor to the byte cursor for selecting the entire 1 byte next to the address.
When the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field or is the byte cursor, the values of the entire 1
byte of the address can be modified.
(3) Page keys
Use the page keys to move the display.
Return key operation

On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the return key is disabled.
To terminate the forced input/output mode and display the SIGNAL STATUS screen again, use soft key
[EXIT].
- 217 -
C. CUSTOM LADDER
PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE
C
C.1
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT

SWITCHING PROCEDURE
OVERVIEW
When custom ladder program comment display needs to be switched according to the language setting on
the CNC, set the system parameters according to the procedure below by using FANUC LADDER-III.
C.2
SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING
Use the procedure below to set a comment display language.

(1) Open the custom ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III.
(2) Open the system parameter screen.
- 218 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
C. CUSTOM LADDER
PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE
(3) Click [Language for Comment]. Next, on the [Language for Comment] dialog box, set comment
set numbers to be displayed on the PMC screen for the CNC display language.
Number of display language
settings (comments)
Displays the first comment

when the CNC display
language is English.
Displays the second comment
language is Japanese.
Displays the first comment
language is other than English
and Japanese.
Comment set number

First comment = 0
Second comment = 1
:
Delimit a CNC display language from a
comment set number with a comma.
CNC display language

number
[CNC display language numbers]

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
English
Japanese
German
French
Chinese (traditional)
Italian
Korean
Spanish
Dutch
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
-1:
- 219 -
Danish
Portuguese
Polish
Hungarian
Swedish
Czech
Chinese (simplified)
Russian
Other
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
With this series, the PMC message multi-language display function is available. When compared with
the conventional multi-language display function using the message shift function, the PMC message
multi-language display function has the features indicated below. For details, refer to "FANUC
LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234)".
Alarm message and operator message data is stored in a memory card format different from the
format used for conventional ladder programs, and is loaded into the CNC independently of these
ladder programs.
Multi-language alarm message and operator message data can be defined.
Multi-language settings can be made without dividing A addresses. This means that all A
addresses can be used for each language to define many messages.
When the CNC display language setting is changed, the language for alarm messages and operator
messages is switched without turning off the power of the CNC.
To use the PMC message multi-language display function, use the following procedure:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Create a message file for multi-language display.

Add message data to the main body of the ladder program.
Convert the message data to a memory card format file.
Incorporate the created memory card format file into the CNC.
TIP
Second PMC message files for the multi-language display function to be used
with the custom PMC are not installed on the machine at the time of shipment
from the factory.
To stop the use of the multi-language display function after a second PMC
message file is installed to use the multi-language display function, the second
PMC message file "M2PMCMSG" needs to be deleted. For the procedure of
deletion, see (7) in Section 11.2, "OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN".
- 220 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
D.1
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE

DISPLAY
Create message data by using a text editor on the personal computer.

Here, set message data in a language other than English.
The data format is indicated below.
1.
File format
File type = Text file (*.TXT)
Character code = ANSI/Unicode(UTF-16)
(Identification code)
(Title information)
(Comment between lines)
(Message data 1)
(Message data 2)
(Comment between lines)
(Message data 3)
(Message data 4)
:
(Identification code)
2.
Identification code
An identification code is used to mark the start and end of message data.
Start:
%@4-D
End: %
3.
Title information
Enclose title information in double quotation marks.
Up to 256 half-size characters can be entered. (Title information can be omitted.)
4.
Comment between lines

Enclose a comment between lines in double quotation marks.
No comment between lines is output to a memory card format file.
- 221 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
5.
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Message data
Example)
Language ID
Address
Message character string
$1
%A100.0
1900 COOLANT ALARM
(a) Language ID
Specify a language ID for a message character string with "Dollar($)"+"Language ID".
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Japanese
German
French
Chinese (Traditional)
Italian
Language ID
7: Spanish
10: Portuguese
15: Chinese (Simplified)
16: Russian
(b) Address
Be sure to prefix % to an address.
The usable addresses are A100.0 to A149.7.
(c) Message character string
Specify an alarm message number at the beginning then specify an alarm message to be
displayed.
An example of message data is given below. ([@0A@] of title information represents a line feed
code.)
%@4-D
" FANUC ROBODRILL D14/21iA SERIES MESSAGE DATA@0A@ EDITION :
0001@0A@ DATE
: 2012/03/29 "
$2 %A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:
Added alarm)
$2 %A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note:

:
Added operator message)
$10
%A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:
$10
%A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note:
Added alarm)
Added operator message)
TIP
In this message data file, set messages in a language other than English.
Set English message data as message data for the main body of the ladder
program.
- 222 -
B-85314EN-1/01
D.2
APPENDIX
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF

THE LADDER PROGRAM
Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.
- 223 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Add and edit English messages.

Even when no English message is needed, be sure to set alarm numbers.
The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message
numbers, and A addresses.
Alarm
Operator message
A address
1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099
A100.0 to A149.7
- 224 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
D.3
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA
D.3.1
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display
Convert a text file (mnemonic file) containing message data for multi-language display to a memory card
format file.
Open the command prompt screen.
Execute the following at the command prompt (as an example where a file created in Section D.1 is
named PMC2_MSG.TXT):
>C:
>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM
Explanation)
Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.
(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)
Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the mnemonic format message file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) created in
Section D.1 to a second PMC message file (PMC2_MSG.MEM) in the memory card format for
multi-language display that can be loaded with the ROBODRILL.
A message file in the memory card format can be created by creating and executing the following BAT
file:
File name (example): MAKE_MEM.BAT
Contents of a BAT file (example):
C:
CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM
- 225 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
NOTE
1 FPMCMSG.exe is stored in the FANUC LADDER-III installation folder
("C\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3" usually).
2 Usually, the result of command execution is output to the output screen. Use a
"greater than" sign (>) for redirection to a file or printer from the output screen.
3 Line comments other than title information are not output to a memory card
format file.
FPMCMSG is detailed below.
FPMCMSG
[drive:][path]message-file1 [+ [drive:][path]message-file2]
[/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file] [/l=[drive:][path]lad-file]
/o=[drive:][path] mcard-file
[+
Parameters
[drive:][path]message-file1, [drive:][path]message-file2,
Specifies the location and name of a source file of multi-language PMC messages.
Multiple files can be specified using a plus sign (+).
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file
A memory card file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.
For lad-mcard-file, specify the name of a memory card file of a PMC sequence program related to the source file of
multi-language PMC messages.
This parameter can be omitted.
/l=[drive:][path]lad-file
A LAD file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.
For lad-file, specify the name of a LAD file related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages.
If the specified LAD file contains no memory card file, the check with this parameter is not performed.
This parameter can be omitted.
Do not execute this tool when the LAD file specified for /L is open on FANUC LADDER-III.
/o=[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory card file) to be created.
D.3.2
Converting the Ladder Program
Compile the ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III to create a memory card format file. For details,
see Section A.3.
- 226 -
B-85314EN-1/01
D.4
APPENDIX
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO

THE CNC
Install two memory card format files created in Section D.3 on the CNC.
For installation of the files on the CNC, two methods are available:
One method writes the files directly to the flash ROM from the boot menu.
The other method reads the files from the I/O screen of the PMC to the memory then writes the files
to the flash ROM.
For details, see Chapter 11, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA".
D.5
CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A

MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE
When editing message data again by using a memory card format message file for multi-language display,
convert data output from the machine, to a mnemonic format file, according to the following procedure:
(1) Back up a ROBODRILL message file for multi-language display from the machine. (See Chapter
11.)
(2) Copy the backed-up message file for multi-language display to the hard disk of the personal
computer.
(Example: Copy the message file to C:\PMC folder.)
(3) Open the command prompt screen.
- 227 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(4) Execute the following at the command prompt:

>C:
>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.000 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT
Explanation)
Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.
(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)
Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the memory card format message file (PMC2_MSG.000) to a
mnemonic format file (PMC2_MSG.TXT). (The file name is just an example. Change it to the name
of an actually backed-up message file for multi-language display.)
For repeated conversion, create a BAT file with the contents above.
FPMCMSG is detailed below.
FPMCMSG
[drive:][path]mcard-file
[/unicode]
/o=[drive:] [path]message-text-file
Parameters
[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory
card file).
/unicode
Outputs the message character strings to a source file in Unicode.
If this parameter is omitted, the message character strings are output in ANSI.
/o=[drive:][path]message-text-file
Specifies the location and name of a source file.
(5) With a text editor, open and edit the file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) converted to the mnemonic format.
- 228 -
INDEX
B-85314EN-1/01
INDEX
<A>
<F>
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL ................120

Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module) ..37
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ................22
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC ........47
AI TOOL MONITOR ..................................................127
ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST.................144
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY...132
ALARM OUTPUT 2....................................................117
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ....................126
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION....................209

FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL ................106
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL.............................126
<I>
I/O Communication Error Messages............................172
I/O Link Connection Unit ..............................................22
I/O Module Editing ......................................................189
I/O Unit Model-A...........................................................10
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT
FILES INTO THE CNC...........................................227
INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA ...............................78
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS.............................6
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS..............48
INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS ...........................84
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION
(OPTION) ................................................................117
<B>
BASIC SIGNALS ........................................................105
BLOCK SKIP...............................................................136
<C>
COMPLETION OF MACHINING ..............................125
CONFIRMATION .........................................................71
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS.......129
CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................182
CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE
TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE .......................227
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA ............................225
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display225
Converting the Ladder Program ...................................226
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING
COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT,
AND AIR BLOW.....................................................125
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item.......136
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ............................221
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN
BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM ..................223
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE ...................................218
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION...........193
CUSTOM MACROS ...................................................130
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC
LADDER-III ............................................................181
<L>
Ladder Editing .............................................................186
LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND
LOADING FILE CREATION .................................190
LADDER PROGRAM EDITING................................185
Ladder Program Message Editing ................................205
<M>
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89).......116
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ...............................131
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP....................................132
MACHINE STATUS ...................................................105
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ..................................124
Message Editing...........................................................188
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen.......................................................................144
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ...........220
<N>
NOTES.............................................................................4
<D>
<O>
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS..71
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT

SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF
SIGNALS .................................................................215
OPERATION CONTROL ...........................................131
Operation Errors...........................................................157
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ...........................122
OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN......................81
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN ....78
OPERATOR'S PANEL................................................121
Optional I/O Module Connection...................................46
OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......10
OUTLINE ........................................................................1
OVERRIDE CONTROL..............................................133
<E>
EDITING .......................................................................50
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES65,205
EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS...........................51,53
EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ...................68
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION................................70
EXPLANATION OF TERMS .........................................3
EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..113
EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH
FUNCTION..............................................................110
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH
FUNCTION..............................................................108
i-1
INDEX
B-85314EN-1/01
OVERVIEW .........................................................209,218
<P>
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are
Used............................................................................46
PMC System Alarm Messages .....................................152
POSITION SWITCH ...................................................128
POWER-OFF ...............................................................132
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT...............................123
<R>
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ..........................117
ROBOT INTERFACE .................................................134
<S>
SCREEN DISPLAY..............................................128,214
SETTING PARAMETERS..........................................143
SETTING PMC PARAMETERS...................................74
SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED
INPUT/OUTPUT .....................................................213
SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS...................................................73
SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................5
SPINDLE .....................................................................127
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......6
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ...........................50
Switching to the Edit Screen ..........................................51
Symbol and Comment Editing .....................................187
System Parameter Editing ............................................189
SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING............................218
<T>
Terminal Module B ........................................................29
Title Editing .................................................................185
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ....................................118
<U>
USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 137
i-2
REVISION RECORD
B-85314EN-1/01
REVISION RECORD
Edition
01
Date
Contents
Jun., 2012
r-1
B-85314EN-1/01
* B - 8 5 3 1 4 E N - 1 / 0 1 *

FANUC ROBODRILL Custom PMC Function Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

FANUC ROBODRILL Custom PMC Function Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

FANUC

CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION

FANUC ROBODRILL -D14 (M,L,S) i A5

FANUC ROBODRILL -D21 (M,L, S) i A5

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to death or serious injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to light or moderate injury.

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

PURPOSES OF THE MACHINE

Daily Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Personnel

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

The manuals for this machine include the following:

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 6

STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......................................... 6

I/O Unit Model-A...................................................................................................10

Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)..........................................37

Terminal Module B............................................................................................ 29

ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC.................................... 47

INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS ......................................... 48

STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ............................................................ 50

Switching to the Edit Screen ..................................................................................51

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES ...................................... 65

DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS ..................................... 71

10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS ............................................................ 74

OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN...................................... 78

12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER

BASIC SIGNALS ....................................................................................... 105

EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION ..................... 108

13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................. 137

CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III ......................... 181

CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................................................ 182

LADDER PROGRAM EDITING ................................................................. 185

LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION . 190

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 209

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE

Ladder Program Message Editing ........................................................................205

FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION............................................... 209

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 218

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ........................................ 220

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY.......... 221

Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display.......................................225

INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC... 227

LEDs and other indicators for alarms are not required.

Conventional system using a commercially

System using the custom PMC function

Can be input and

Message data for

With multi-language display

where K: Keep relay, #7: Seventh bit

Terminal block [XTC1]

16 inputs (X0.0 to X1.7)

Terminal block [XTC2]

16 inputs (X2.0 to X3.7)

Terminal block [XT1] 16 inputs (X4.0 to X5.7)

Connection diagram from DI01 to 50-pin terminal block (XTC1)

Connection diagram from DI02 to 34-pin terminal block (XTC2)

OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

I/O Unit Model-A

Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules

Slots 4 and 5: for use only

Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with

(Specifications of input/output modules)

Terminal block (M3.5)

Terminal block (M3.5)